DE29924439U1 - Cleaning implement for cleaning hard surfaces comprises handle, removable cleaning pad comprising absorbent layer and optionally cleaning element(s) such as perfumes and scrubbing layers - Google Patents

Abstract

A cleaning implement for cleaning hard surfaces comprises a handle, a removable cleaning pad comprising absorbent layer and optionally cleaning element(s) such as perfumes and scrubbing layers etc. A cleaning implement comprises : (a) a handle; and (b) a removable cleaning pad comprising: (i) absorbent layer; and (ii) additional element(s) selected from: (aa) optionally, a liquid pervious scrubbing layer; (bb) optionally, an attachment layer; (cc) optionally, multiple planar surfaces; (dd) optionally, functional cuff(s); (ee) optionally, a density gradient throughout absorbent layer(s); (ff) optionally adhesive scrubbing strip(s) removably attached to the cleaning pad; and (gg) optionally, perfume carrier complex. Independent claims are also included for: (1) a hard surface cleaning composition comprising: (a) optionally, 0.001-0.5 wt.% of a composition of surfactant; (b) optionally, hydrophilic polymer; (c) optionally, organic solvent; (d) optionally, 0.01-1 wt.% of mono- or polycarboxylic acid; (e) optionally, 0.01-1 wt.% of odor control agent; (f) optionally, a source of peroxide; (g) optionally, 0.001-0.1 wt.% of a thickening polymer; (h) aqueous solvent system; (i) optionally, suds suppressor; (j) optionally, 0.005-0.2 wt.% of a perfume comprising: (i) optionally, 0.05-90 wt.% of perfume of volatile, hydrophilic perfume material; (ii) optionally, 0.2 wt.% of volatile, hydrophobic perfume material; (iii) optionally, less than 10 wt.% of residual, hydrophilic perfume material; and (iv) less than 10 wt.% of residual, hydrophobic perfume material; and (k) a detergent adjuvant; (2) a method of cleaning a hard surface comprising: (a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and a removable, dry cleaning substrate to remove dust and fine particulate matter from the surface; (b) contacting the surface with a hard surface cleaning composition to wet the surface; (c) contacting the wet surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and a removable cleaning pad to remove the hard surface cleaning composition from the surface; and (d) allowing the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate rinse solution; (3) A method of cleaning hard surfaces comprising: (a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and a removable dry, cleaning substrate to remove dust and fine particulate matter from the surface; (b) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and a removable, pre-moistened cleaning wipe to remove additional soil from the surface; and (c) allowing the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate rinse solution; (4) a cleaning implement comprising: (a) a handle; (b) a support head pivotally attached to the handle; (c) a cleaning substrate removably attached to the support head, the substrate having an absorbent capacity of at least 5 g/g; and (d) a liquid delivery system for providing a cleaning liquid to a surface to be cleaned, the system being configured to spray at least 2 mls/sec of a cleaning liquid; and (5) a cleaning implement comprising: (a) a handle; (b) a support head pivotally attached to the handle; (c) a cleaning substrate removably attached to the support head, the substrate; and (d) a hand held liquid sprayer removably attached to the cleaning implement for dispensing liquid onto the surface to be cleaned.

Description

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

PATENT ATTORNEYS - EUROPEAN PATENT ATTORNEYS

Or. Nicolaus ler Meer, DIpI,-Cbem, Peter Urner, Dlpl.-Pnys. Qebhafd Merkie, Dipl.-|ng. (FH) Bernhard P. Wagner, Dipl.-Phys. Mauerkircherstrasse 45 0-B1679 MUNICH

Helmut Stelnmsister, DIpI.-Ing. Manfred Wiebusch

Artur-Ladebeck-Strasse D-33617 BIELEFELD

DE 299 24 439.3 Case: 736S/DE-UM

tM/cb 24.02.2003

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COKtPANY

One Procter & Gamble Plaza USA - Cincinnati, Ohio 45202

Cleaning device in the shape of a mop

QtJERVER POINTS TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is related to the following applications, which are hereby incorporated by reference: U.S. Application Serial No. 09/5188,064 filed November 9, 1998 by Nagel et al. (P&G Case 7337); U.S. Application Serial No. 09/201,618 filed November 30, 1998 by Benecke (P&G Case 7361); U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/110,476 filed December 1, 1998 by Policicchlo et al. (P&G Case 7368P); U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/156,286 filed September 27, 10, 1999 by Sherry et al. (P&G Case 7803P); and U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. / filed November 2, 1999 by Policicchio et al. (P&G Case 7368P2).

TER MEER STBlNMfISTBR &*'PÄ'RTNER GbR -2-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

TECHNICAL AREA

The present invention relates to cleaning compositions, pads, pledgets, cloths, wipes and implements suitable for removing soil from hard surfaces. The cleaning pads and/or cloths have an improved structure comprising apertured formed films, functional sleeves, density gradients, adhesive scrubbing strips and/or fragrance carrier complexes. The cleaning cloths are designed to provide functional sleeves. The present invention further relates to a cleaning implement comprising a handle and preferably an improved detachable absorbent cleaning pad. The present invention further relates to methods of using cleaning compositions, pads, cloths, wipes and implements for cleaning hard surfaces.
15

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

The literature is replete with products suitable for cleaning hard surfaces such as ceramic floor tiles, hardwood floors, store counters and the like. With respect to cleaning floors, a variety of devices are described which include a handle and some means for absorbing a liquid cleaning composition. Such devices include those which are reusable, including mops which contain cotton strands, cellulose and/or synthetic strips, sponges and the like. Although these mops are suitable for removing a variety of soils from hard surfaces, they typically have the disadvantage of having to perform one or more rinsing steps during use to avoid saturating the material with dirt, grime and other residues. These mops therefore require the use of a separate container to perform the rinsing action(s), which rinsing actions are typically not suitable for adequately removing the soil residues. This can lead to redeposition of significant amounts of soil during subsequent passes of the mop. As reusable mops are used for extended periods of time, they become increasingly dirty and take on unpleasant odors. This impairs their further cleaning performance.

TER MEER STEi)W:Eis:rert-& ^: PÄ"RTNER GbR -3-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

To avoid some of the negative characteristics of reusable mops, attempts have been made to provide mops having disposable cleaning pads. For example, U.S. Patent No. 5,094,559, issued March 10, 1992 to Rivera et al., describes a mop having a disposable cleaning pad having an abrasive layer for removing soil from soiled surfaces, an absorbent layer for absorbing liquid after the cleaning operation, and a liquid impermeable layer disposed between the abrasive layer and the absorbent layer. The pad further includes a rupturable packet means disposed between the abrasive layer and the liquid impermeable layer. The rupturable packets are arranged such that when they are ruptured, a liquid is directed toward the surface to be cleaned. During the cleaning operation with the abrasive layer, the impermeable layer prevents the movement of the liquid to the absorbent absorbent layer. After the cleaning operation is completed, the pad is removed from the mop handle and reattached so that the absorbent layer comes into contact with the floor. Although this device eliminates the need to perform multiple rinses, it does require the user to physically manipulate the pad and reattach a soiled, wet pad to complete the cleaning operation.

Similarly, U.S. Patent 5,419,015 issued to Garcia on May 30, 1995 describes a mop having removable, washable work pads. The pad is described as having an upper layer adapted to be attached to a mop head by hooks, a middle layer of a synthetic microporous plastic foam, and a lower layer which comes into contact with the surface during the cleaning operation. It is stated that the composition of the lower layer depends on the end use of the device, i.e.

washing, polishing or scrubbing. Although the document addresses the problems associated with mops that must be rinsed during use, the patent does not disclose a cleaning device that is capable of removing the dirt deposited on typical household hard surfaces, particularly floors, to a sufficient extent that the surface is considered to be substantially dirt-free. In particular, the synthetic foam described by Garcia for absorbing the

·

t ·

·

TER MEER STE3iNIVFElS-T ^# ER-&>ARTNER GbR -4-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Cleaning solution has a relatively low absorbency for water and water-based solutions. As a result, the user must either use small amounts of cleaning solution to stay within the range of the pad's absorbency, or the user must leave a significant amount of cleaning solution on the surface being cleaned. In either case, the overall performance of the cleaning pad is not optimal.

While a variety of hard surface cleaning devices are capable of removing the vast majority of soil types encountered by the typical consumer during the cleaning process, they suffer from the disadvantage of requiring one or more cleaning steps. The prior art devices that address the issue of convenience typically do so at the expense of cleaning performance. Accordingly, there remains a need for a device that provides both convenient and beneficial soil removal.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

According to one embodiment, the present invention comprises cleaning compositions, preferably for use with the cleaning pads and/or cleaning devices described herein, comprising:

(a) optionally from about 0.001% to about 0.5% by weight of the composition of surfactant, preferably selected from the group consisting of alkyl polysaccharides, alkyl ethoxylates, alkyl sulfonates, and mixtures thereof;

(b) optionally hydrophilic polymer, preferably less than about 0.5% by weight of the composition;

(c) optionally organic solvent, preferably about 0.25% to about 7% by weight of the composition and preferably having a boiling point of about 120 ^° C to about 180 ^° C;

(d) optionally from about 0.01% to about 1% by weight of the composition of mono- or polycarboxylic acid;

(e) optionally from about 0.01% to about 1% by weight of the composition of odor control agent, preferably cyclodextrin;

TER MEER STEtNMfeiSTferi'&>A ^# RTNER GbR -5-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 21.01.2003

(f) optionally a peroxide source, preferably from about 0.05% to about 5% by weight of the composition and preferably selected from the group consisting of benzoyl peroxide, hydrogen peroxide, and mixtures thereof;

(g) optionally from about 0.001% to about 0.1% by weight of the composition thickening polymer;
(h) aqueous solvent system, preferably at least about 80 wt.

% of composition;
(i) where appropriate, foam suppressors;

(j) optionally from about 0.005% to about 0.2% by weight of the composition of a fragrance comprising:
(i) optionally from about 0.05% to about 90% by weight of the fragrance

volatile hydrophilic fragrance material;

(ii) optionally at least about 0.2% by weight of the fragrance of volatile, hydrophobic fragrance material;

(iii) optionally less than about 10% by weight of the fragrance residual hydrophilic fragrance material;
(iv) less than about 10% by weight of the fragrance residual hydrophobic

fragrance material;

(k) optionally detergent adjuvant, preferably selected from the group consisting of detergent builders, buffers, preservatives, antibacterial agents, dyes, bleaches, chelating agents, enzymes, hydrotropes, corrosion inhibitors and mixtures thereof.

According to a further embodiment, the present invention relates to a preferably disposable cleaning pad for cleaning hard surfaces, which cleaning pad comprises:

(a) at least one absorption layer;

(b) optionally a liquid-permeable scrubbing layer, which liquid-permeable scrubbing layer is preferably a shaped film having apertures, more preferably a macroscopically stretched, three-dimensional plastic nonwoven with tapered or funnel-shaped apertures and/or surface irregularities, which preferably comprises a hydrophobic material;

(c) if applicable, a fixing layer, which fixing layer

TER MEER STed!NIVtEIS.fE4& ^: «p ^: A'RtNER GbR -6-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

preferably comprises a clear or translucent material, preferably a clear or translucent polyethylene film, and wherein the fastening layer preferably comprises a loop and/or hook material for attachment to a support head of a handle of a cleaning device;

(d) optionally a plurality of planar surfaces;

(e) optionally at least one functional cuff, preferably at least one freely movable, looped functional cuff;

(f) optionally a density gradient in at least one absorbent layer; which density gradient preferably comprises a first absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.01 g/cm ³ to about 0.15 g/cm ³ , preferably from about 0.03 g/cm ³ to about 0.1 g/cm ³ , and more preferably from about 0.04 g/cm ³ to about 0.06 g/cm ³ , and a second absorbent layer having a density of from about 0.04 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ , preferably from about 0.1 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ and more preferably from about 0.12 g/cm ³ to about 0.17 g/cm ³ ; wherein the density of the first absorption layer is about 0.04 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.07 g/cm ³ and more preferably about 0.1 g/cm ³ less than the density of the second absorption layer;

(g) optionally at least one adhesive scrubbing strip, preferably comprising a material selected from the group consisting of nylon, polyester, polypropylene, abrasive material and mixtures thereof; and

(h) optionally a fragrance carrier complex, preferably selected from the group consisting of cyclodextrin inclusion complexes, matrix fragrance

Microcapsules and mixtures thereof, wherein the fragrance carrier complex is preferably present in an absorbent layer. Preferably, the cleansing pad has a ti2oo absorption capacity of at least about 5 g/g (grams/gram).
30

According to a further embodiment, the present invention relates to a cleaning device comprising:

a stem;
a carrier head pivotally attached to the handle; a cleaning substrate removably attached to the carrier head, which

TER MEER STBLNMElS'tBR & ^e PATiTNER GbR -7-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Cleaning substrate has an absorption capacity of at least about 5 g/g; and

a liquid delivery system for supplying a cleaning liquid to a surface to be cleaned, which liquid delivery system is arranged to spray at least about 2 ml/s of a cleaning liquid.

According to a further embodiment, the present invention relates to a method for cleaning a hard surface, comprising:
10

(a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement having a handle and a removable dry cleaning substrate, preferably a non-woven water-entangled cleaning cloth of the type described above, to remove dust and fine particulate material from the surface;

(b) contacting the surface with a hard surface cleaning composition, preferably a hard surface cleaning composition as described herein, to moisten the surface;

(c) contacting the wet surface with a cleaning device comprising a handle and a removable cleaning pad, preferably a cleaning pad as described herein, for substantially removing the hard surface cleaning composition from the surface; and

(d) Allow the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate rinsing solution.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Fig. 1 shows a perspective view of a cleaning pad according to the invention.

Fig. 2 shows a perspective view of a cleaning pad according to the invention.
35

Fig. 3 shows a perspective exploded view of the absorption layer of a

TER MEER STÄilsHWEf&TETl & ^ft PÄfcTNER GbR -8-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

of a cleaning pad according to the invention.

Fig. 4a shows a plan view of a preferred cleaning pad according to the invention.
5

Fig. 4b shows a sectional view of the cleaning pad shown in Fig. 4a.

Fig. 5 shows a perspective view of a preferred cleaning device

according to the present invention.
10

Fig. 6 shows a plan view of the cleaning device shown in Fig. 5.

Fig. 7 shows a side view of another preferred cleaning device according to the present invention, which cleaning device comprises a handle, a mop head and a hand spray device stored in a cage.

Fig. 7a shows a side view of another preferred cleaning device according to the present invention, which cleaning device comprises a handle, a mop head and a hand spray device stored in a cage with a sleeve.

Fig. 8 shows a perspective view of another preferred cleaning device according to the present invention, which cleaning device has a plurality of fastening structures.

Fig. 9 shows a schematic representation of a liquid dispensing system for use with the cleaning device of Fig. 5.

Fig. 10 shows an illustration of a spray pattern emitted by the cleaning device shown in Fig. 5.

Figure 11 is a graphical representation of exemplary voltages, volumetric flow rates, and spray nozzle inlet pressures as a function of continuous pumping operation of a cleaning device according to the present invention.

TER MEER STEVNIvTEISTETC & "PARTNER GbR - 9 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Fig. 12 shows a schematic representation of a test arrangement for measuring the mop handle bend.

Figures 13 and 13A show schematic representations of test arrangements for determining spray pattern dimensions.

Fig. 14 shows a schematic representation of a device for measuring the performance under pressure (PUP) of a cleaning pad.
10

Fig. 15 shows an enlarged sectional view of the piston/cylinder arrangement shown in Fig. 14.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 15

Reference will now be made in more detail to the preferred embodiments of the invention, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings, in which like reference numerals refer to like elements throughout the several views, and in which reference numerals having the same final two digits (e.g., 20 and 120) indicate similar elements.

I. Definitions

As used herein, the term "comprising" means that the various components, ingredients, or steps may be used together in carrying out the present invention. Accordingly, the term "comprising" includes more limited terms such as "consisting essentially of" and "consisting of".

As used herein, the term "direct fluid communication" means that a fluid can be readily transferred between two components or layers of a cleaning pad (e.g., the scrubbing layer and the absorbent layer) without substantial accumulation, transport, or restriction by an intervening layer. For example, woven fabrics, nonwovens, construction adhesives, and the like can be present between the two separate components while maintaining the "direct fluid communication" so long as they do not substantially interfere with the fluid.

TER SEA STONES I S*f ER'& PARTNER GbR

& PARTNERS GbR - 10 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

or retain it when it is transferred from one component or layer to another.

The term "macroscopically expanded" as used herein to describe three-dimensional plastic nonwovens, fabrics, tapes, sheets or films refers to nonwovens, fabrics, tapes, sheets and films which have been treated to produce a three-dimensional molded structure on the surface such that both surfaces exhibit the three-dimensional pattern of the molded structure, which pattern is readily visible to the naked eye when the perpendicular distance between the observer's eye and the plane of the fabric is about 30.5 cm (12 inches). Such macroscopically expanded or stretched nonwovens, fabrics, tapes, sheets and films typically acquire conformation to the surface of the molded structure by embossing, i.e., when the molded structure has a pattern predominantly composed of male projections, by negative embossing, i.e., when the forming structure has a pattern formed predominantly by a female capillary network, or by extrusion of a resinous melt directly onto the surface of a forming structure of either type. In contrast, the term "planar" when used to describe plastic nonwovens, fabrics, tapes, sheets and films refers to the overall condition of the nonwoven, fabric, tape, sheet or film when viewed by the naked eye on a macroscopic scale. In this context, "planar" nonwovens, fabrics, tapes, sheets and films include nonwovens, fabrics, tapes, sheets and films which have fine-scale surface variations on one or both sides, but which surface variations are not readily visible to the naked eye when the perpendicular distance between the observer's eye and the plane of the fabric is about 30.5 cm (12 inches) or more.

The term "Z-dimension" as used herein means the dimension perpendicular to the length and width of the cleaning pad according to the invention or a component thereof. The Z-dimension therefore corresponds to the thickness of the cleaning pad or a component thereof.

As used herein, the term "X-Y dimension" refers to the plane perpendicular to the thickness of the cleaning pad or a component thereof. The X and Y dimensions correspond to the length and width of the cleaning pad or a component thereof, respectively. In general, when the cleaning

.i

TER MEER STETMIVteISTER ^: "& PARTNER GbR - 11 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

pad is used in conjunction with a handle, the device moves in a direction parallel to the Y dimension (or width) of the pad. (See Figure 1 and the discussion below.) Of course, the present invention is not limited to cleaning pads having four sides. Other shapes such as circular, elliptical, and the like may also be used. When determining the width of the pad at any point in the Z dimension, it is to be understood that the pad is rated according to the intended use.

The term "layer" as used herein means a part or component of a cleaning pad whose primary dimension is X-Y, i.e., along its length and width. It is to be understood that the term layer is not necessarily limited to individual layers or sheets of a material. Thus, a layer may include laminates or combinations of multiple sheets or sheets of the required type of materials. Accordingly, the term "layer" includes the terms "layers" and "layered."

The term "hydrophilic" as used herein is used to refer to surfaces which are wetted by aqueous fluids deposited thereon. Hydrophilicity and wettability are typically referred to in terms of the contact angle and surface tension of the fluids and solid surfaces in question. This is more fully explained in the American Chemical Society publication " Contact Angle. Wettability and Adhesion" , edited by Robert F. Gould (copyright 1964), which work is hereby incorporated by reference. A surface is said to be wetted by a fluid (i.e., hydrophilic) if either the contact angle between the fluid and the surface is less than 90°, or if the fluid tends to spread spontaneously over the surface, both conditions normally co-existing. In contrast, a surface is considered "hydrophobic" if the contact angle is greater than 90° and the fluid does not spread spontaneously over the surface.

As used herein, the term "reinforcing fabric" means any durable material which provides texture to the surface contacting side of the scrubbing layer of the cleaning pad and which has a sufficient degree of openness to allow the necessary fluid movement to the absorbent layer of the cleaning pad. Suitable materials include materials which have a continuous, open structure.

'/ - IJ j. Ü\. ^:

TER MEER STETMmEISTER"& PARTNER GbR -12-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

sen, such as synthetic and wire mesh fabrics. The open areas of these materials can be readily controlled by varying the number of interconnected strands forming the mesh, by controlling the thickness of the interconnected strands, etc. Other suitable materials include those whose texture is formed by a discontinuous pattern printed on a substrate. In this regard, a durable material (e.g. a synthetic material) can be printed on a substrate in the form of a continuous or discontinuous pattern, for example as individual dots and/or lines, to form the required texture. Similarly, the continuous or discontinuous pattern can be printed on a release material which then serves as the reinforcing fabric. These patterns can be repeated or random. It will be understood that one or more of the ways described can be combined to achieve the desired texture in forming the reinforcing material, if used.

The Z-height and open area of the reinforcement and/or scrubbing substrate layer assist in controlling or retarding the flow of a liquid into the absorbent core material. The Z-height of the reinforcement and/or a scrubbing substrate serves to provide a means of controlling the volume of liquid in contact with the cleaning surface while simultaneously controlling the rate of liquid absorption and fluid communication to the absorbent core material.

According to the invention, an "upper" layer of a cleaning pad is a layer that is relatively distant from the surface to be cleaned (i.e., with respect to the device, relatively closer to the handle of the device during use). The term "lower" layer, on the other hand, means a layer of a cleaning pad that is relatively closer to the surface to be cleaned (i.e., with respect to the device, relatively farther from the handle of the device during use). Accordingly, the scrubbing layer is preferably the lowermost layer and the absorbent layer is preferably an upper layer relative to the scrubbing layer. The terms "upper" and "lower" are used similarly when referring to multi-layered layers (i.e., when the scrubbing layer is a two-layer material). With respect to the sequential arrangement of the layers (i.e., first layer, second layer, and third layer), a first layer is a "lower"

TER MEER STEVWmEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 13-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

layer relative to a second layer. Similarly, a third layer is an "upper" layer relative to a second layer. The terms "above" and "below" are used to describe the relative locations of two or more materials in the thickness direction of a cleaning pad. For example, a material A is "above" material B if material B is closer to the scrubbing layer than material A is. Similarly, material B is "below" material A in this comparison.

All documents and literature referred to herein are incorporated by reference unless otherwise indicated. All parts, ratios and percentages in the specification, examples and claims are by weight and all numerical limits are specified to the normal degree of accuracy permitted by the state of the art unless otherwise indicated. 15

II. Cleaning composition for hard surfaces

In one embodiment, the present invention comprises hard surface cleaning compositions, preferably for use with the cleaning pads and/or cleaning devices described herein, comprising:

(a) optionally from about 0.001% to about 0.5% by weight of the composition of surfactant, preferably selected from the group consisting of alkyl polysaccharides, alkyl ethoxylates, alkyl sulfonates, and mixtures thereof;

(b) optionally hydrophilic polymer, preferably less than about 0.5% by weight of the composition;

(c) optionally organic solvent, preferably about 0.25% to about 7% by weight of the composition and preferably having a boiling point of about 120 ^° C to about 180 ^° C;

(d) optionally from about 0.01% to about 1% by weight of the composition of mono- or polycarboxylic acid;

(e) optionally from about 0.01% to about 1% by weight of the composition of odor control agent, preferably cyclodextrin;

(f) optionally a peroxide source, preferably about 0.05% to about 5

I GbR - 14 -

VI 21.01.2003

wisely selected from the chung of which comprehensive

~rew% of the composition at least about 80 wt.

3% by weight of the composition

% by weight of the fragrance eierials;

:w% of the fragrance of an il;
-% of the fragrance from residual

offs of remaining hydro-

Preferably selected from the group comprising agents, antibacterial agents, enzymes, hydrotropic agents.

i Medium

lile polymer not present in the ■te surfaces Ines of the preferred above preferred herein to be polysaccharides present in the srteil on July 7, 1998 to Philip Duke; 5,883,059, d personal cleansing com-Allen Furman; Michel Jo-062, "Manual dishwashing 1 Crombie Addison; Peter

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 15 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Robert Foley; and Andrew Michael Allsebrook; and 5,906,973, "Process for cleaning vertical or inclined hard surfaces", issued May 25, 1999 to Dimitrios Ouzounis and Wolfgang Nierhaus.

Suitable alkyl polysaccharides for use herein are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,565,647, issued Jan. 21, 1986 to Llenado, which comprise a hydrophobic group containing from about 6 to about 30 carbon atoms, preferably from about 10 to about 16 carbon atoms, and a hydrophilic polysaccharide, e.g., polyglycoside group. The alkyl polysaccharide preferred for acidic or alkaline cleaning compositions/solutions suitable for no-rinse methods preferably comprises a broad distribution of chain lengths as these provide the best combination of wetting, cleaning and low residue upon drying. This "broad distribution" is defined as at least 50% of a chain length mixture comprising from about 10 carbon atoms to about 16 carbon atoms. Preferably, the alkyl group of the alkyl polysaccharide consists of chain length mixtures, preferably ranging from about 6 to about 18 carbon atoms, preferably from about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms, while the hydrophilic group contains about one to about 1.5 saccharide groups, preferably glucoside groups, per molecule. This "broad chain length distribution" is defined by at least about 50% of a chain length mixture comprising about 10 carbon atoms to about 16 carbon atoms. A broad mixture of chain lengths, particularly C 1 -C 16, is highly desirable compared to a narrower chain length range mixture, and particularly compared to alkyl polyglucoside mixtures of shorter chain length (e.g., C 5 -C 10 or C 8 -C 12). It has further been found that the preferred C 1-4 alkyl polyglucoside exhibits significantly improved solubility for the fragrance as well as for other preferred surfactants, including the C 8 -C 12 alkyl ethoxylates, compared to alkyl polyglucosides of shorter and narrower chain length. Any reducing saccharide containing 5 or 6 carbon atoms may be used, for example the glucosyl residues may be replaced by glucose, galactose and galactosyl residues (with the hydrophobic group optionally attached in the 2-, 3-, 4-, etc. positions thus yielding a glucose or galactose as opposed to a glucoside or galactoside). The intersaccharide bonds may be, for example, between the 1-position of the additional saccharide units and the 2-, 3-, 4- and/or 6-positions.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -16-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

tions of the preceding saccharide units. The glycosyl residue is

preferably derived from glucose. J*. I

Optionally and less desirably, a polyalkylene oxide chain may link the hydrophobic moiety and the polysaccharide moiety. The _preferred alkylene oxide is ethylene oxide. Typical hydrophobic groups include ;"**j

• · · · either saturated or unsaturated, branched or unbranched alkyl groups which have 8 to 18, preferably 10 to 16 carbon atoms. Preferably, the _alkyl group is a straight-chain saturated alkyl group. The alkyl group can have up to 3 hydroxyl groups and/or the polyalkylene oxide chain can contain up to about 10, preferably less than 5, alkylene oxide units. Suitable alkyl polysaccharides are octyl, nonyldecyl, undecyl, dodecyl, tridecyl, tetradecyl, pentadecyl, hexadecyl, heptadecyl and octadecyl, di, tri, tetra, penta and hexaglucosides and/or galactoses. Suitable mixtures include coconut alkyl di-, tri-, tetra- and pentaglucosides and tallow alkyl tetra-, penta- and hexaglucosides.

To prepare these compounds, the alkyl or alkylpolyethoxy alcohol is first formed and then reacted with glucose or a glucose sequence to form the glucoside (bond in the 1-position). The additional glycosyl units can then be bonded between their 1-position and the 2-, 3-, 4- and/or 6-position of the preceding glycosyl units, preferably predominantly in the 2-position.

In the alkyl polyglycosides, the alkyl radicals can be derived from the usual sources, such as fats, oils or chemically produced alcohols, while the sugar radicals are formed from hydrolyzed polysaccharides. Alkyl polyglycosides are the condensation product of fatty alcohols and sugars, such as glucose, where the number of glucose units defines the relative hydrophilicity. As discussed above, the sugar units can additionally be alkoxylated either before or after the reaction with the fatty alcohols. Such alkyl polyglycosides are described in more detail in, for example, WO 86/05199. Technical alkyl polyglycosides are generally not molecularly uniform products, but represent mixtures of alkyl groups and mixtures of monosaccharides and various oligosaccharides. For the present invention, alkyl polyglycosides (which are sometimes also referred to as "APGs") are preferred because they provide additional improvement in surface appearance compared to other surfactants. The glycoside residues are preferably glucose residues. The alkyl substituent

•—*—&ggr;

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 17 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ent is preferably a saturated or unsaturated alkyl radical containing about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms, preferably about 8 to about 10 carbon atoms, or a mixture of such alkyl radicals. Cs-Cie alkyl polyglucosides are commercially available (for example, Simusol® surfactants from Seppic Corporation, 75 Quai d'Orsay, 75321 Paris, Cedex 7, France, and Gluco- j"""| pon 425 available from Henkel. However, it has been found that the purity of the alkyl polyglucoside can affect the performance, particularly the end result of certain applications, including products used for daily showers. According to the invention, the preferred alkyl polyglucosides are those which have sufficient purity for personal cleansing. Most preferred are the "cosmetic grade" alkyl polyglucosides, particularly Ce-Cie alkyl polyglucosides such as Plantaren 2000®, Plantaren 2000 N® and Plantaren 2000 N UP®, available from Henkel Corporation (P.O. Box 101100, D-40191 Düsseldorf, Germany).

Another class of nonionic surfactants preferred for use on floors, counters, walls, etc. and similar purposes are the alkyl ethoxylates. The alkyl ethoxylates used in the present invention are either straight chain or branched and contain from about 8 carbon atoms to about 14 carbon atoms and from about 3 ethylene oxide units to about 25 ethylene oxide units. Examples of alkyl ethoxylates include Neodol® 91-6, Neodol 91-8® from Shell Corporation (P.O. Box 2463, 1 Shell Plaza, Houston, Texas) and Alfonic 810-60 from Vista Corporation (900 Threadneedle P.O. Box 19029, Houston, Texas). The more preferred surfactants are the alkyl ethoxylates which have from about 9 to about 12 carbon atoms and from about 4 to about 8 ethylene oxide units. These surfactants provide excellent cleaning effects and work synergistically with the required hydrophilic polymers. A most preferred alkyl ethoxylate is C11EO5, which is available from Shell Chemical Company under the trademark Neodol 1-5. Combinations of alkyl ethoxylates of different chain lengths and/or different degrees of ethoxylation can also be used, for example Neodol 1-3 with Neodol 1-7. These alkyl ethoxylates exhibit desirable wetting and cleaning properties and can be advantageously combined with the preferred Ce-16-alkyl polyglucoside in a matrix containing the wetting polymers of the invention. Without wishing to be limited by theoretical considerations, it is believed that the Ce-16-alkyl polygluco-

^{Γ Τ Γ} Γ

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 18-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

gives superior end results (reduced fogging) in compositions additionally containing the preferred alkyl ethoxylate, particularly when the preferred alkyl ethoxylate is required for superior cleaning effects. The preferred Cs-i6 alkyl polyglucoside has also been shown to improve the fragrance solubility of compositions containing alkyl ethoxylates. Higher levels of fragrances may be beneficial for consumer acceptance.

The ready-to-use liquid compositions of the present invention are prepared with relatively low levels of active materials. Typically, the compositions comprise a sufficient amount of the surfactant and optionally a solvent, as discussed below, to be effective as hard surface cleaners, yet economical; accordingly, they typically contain from about 0.002% to about 0.5% by weight of the composition of the surfactant, preferably the alkyl polyglucoside and/or C 8 -14 alkyl ethoxylate surfactant, and more preferably from about 0.004% to about 0.4% of the surfactant, and even more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.3% of the surfactant. The use of low rather than high levels of surfactant has been found to be beneficial to overall end result performance. It has been found that when the primary surfactant system contains the preferred alkyl ethoxylates, the final remaining haze is favored by specific co-surfactants. These preferred co-surfactants are Cs-sulfonate and Poly-Tergent CS-I.

The liquid compositions of the present invention may optionally contain a minor amount of an additional anionic and/or nonionic detergent surfactant. Such anionic surfactants typically comprise a hydrophobic chain of from about 8 carbon atoms to about 18 carbon atoms, preferably from about 8 to about 16 carbon atoms, and typically include a hydrophilic sulfate, sulfonate or carboxylate head group. In general, the level of optional, for example, anionic surfactants in the present compositions is from about 0.001% to about 0.25%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.2%, and even more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1%, by weight of the composition.

■ · · f &Ggr;&Zgr;"",1&Ggr;

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 19-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

In connection with floors, counters and other surfaces

applications, the selection of the co-surfactant can be critical in both the type and level. It has been found that in compositions containing Cs-C^ alkyl ethoxylates, low levels of Cs sulfonate can improve the final result by providing a "tinting" effect. Tinting is defined as an improvement in the visual appearance of the final result as a result of reduced haze. When present, the Ce sulfonate is preferably used in a weight ratio of about 1:10 to about 1:1 based on the primary surfactant(s). _Ce sulfonate is commercially available from Stepan under the trademark Bio-Terge PAS-8® and from Witco Corporation under the trademark Witconate NAS-8®. Another unique "tinting" surfactant useful in the present invention is the product Poly-Tergent CS-1, which can be purchased from BASF. When present, Poly-Tergent CS-1 is preferably used in a weight ratio of about 1:20 to about 1:1 based on the primary surfactant(s).

Other surface active agents which may be used, although less preferably, and typically in very small amounts, include C ₈ -C 18 alkyl sulfonates (Hostapur SAS® from Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, D-6230 Frankfurt, Germany), straight chain or branched C 10 -C 14 alkyl benzene sulfonates, C 8 -C 18 alkyl ethoxycarboxylate detergent surfactants (Neodox® surfactants, available from Shell Chemical Corporation), C ₁₀ -C ₁₄ alkyl sulfates and ethoxysulfates (for example Stepanol AM® from Stepan). Alkyl ethoxycarboxylates can advantageously be used at extremely low levels (about 0.01% or less) to dissolve the fragrances. This can be a significant advantage considering the low levels of active ingredients which have been found to be most effective in accordance with the invention. Other anionic, nonionic or zwitterionic surface-active agents or surfactants may also be useful as primary surfactants and/or co-surfactants in the compositions of the invention, for example the betaines, examples of which are cocoamidopropyl betaine (for example Lonzain C from Lonza), cetyl betaine (for example Lonzain 16SP from Lonza), hydroxysultaines (for example Miratain CBS from Rhone-Poulenc), sulfobetaines (for example Rewoteric AM CAS-15 from Witco), sulfosuccinates (for example Aerosol OT from American

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -20-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Cyanamide) or amine oxides (e.g. Barlox 14 or Barlox C from Lonzaine).

Alternative nonionic surfactants that can be used are alkoxylated alcohols, which generally contain from about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms in the hydrophobic alkyl chain of the alcohol. Typical alkoxylating groups are propoxy groups or propoxy groups in combination with ethoxy groups. Such compounds are commercially available under the trademark Antarox® from Rhodia (PO Box 425 Carnberry, New Jersey 08512) with a wide variety of chain lengths and degrees of alkoxylation. Block copolymers of ethylene oxide and propylene oxide, which are available under the trademark Pluronic® from BASF, can also be used. Preferred nonionic detergent surfactants that can be used herein are those of the formula R(X) _n H, wherein R is an alkyl chain having from about 6 to about 16 carbon atoms, preferably from about 8 to about 12 carbon atoms, X is a propoxy or a mixture of ethoxy and propoxy groups, and η is an integer having a value from about 4 to about 30, preferably from about 5 to about 8. Other nonionic surfactants that can be used include those derived from natural sources such as sugars, and include Ce-Ci6-N-alkylglucoseamide surfactants. When present, the concentration of the alternative nonionic surfactants is from about 0.01% to about 0.2%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1%, by weight of the composition.

Other surface active agents or surfactants useful in the present hard surface cleaning compositions include those described in U.S. Application Serial No. 09/170,426, filed October 13, 1998 (P&G Case 6401C); U.S. Application Serial No. 09/170,167, filed October 13, 1998 (P&G Case 6403C); U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/031,917, filed November 26, 1996 and published as WO98/237,102 on June 4, 1998 (P&G Case 6404C); U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/061,970 filed October 14, 1997 and published as WO99/19,448 {P&G Case 6885); U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/062,407 filed October 14, 1997 and published as WO99/19,449 (P&G Case 6886).

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -21-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM January 21, 2003

B. Hydrophilic polymer, if used

In preferred embodiments of the invention, a polymeric material is incorporated into the present compositions to improve the hydrophilicity of the treated surface. The increase in hydrophilicity provides an improved final appearance by "draining" of water from the surface and/or spreading of water on the surface, which effect is preferably seen when the surface is rewetted or when it is subsequently treated after rewetting.

is dried. *«c\.

"Run-off effects have been observed on a variety of surfaces, such as glass, ceramics and even harder to wet surfaces such as porcelain enamel. When the water "runs off" the surface evenly and/or spreads across the surface, it minimizes the formation of "hard water spots" that form upon drying. For a product intended to be used as a floor cleaner, the polymer improves surface wetting and aids cleaning performance.

The substantivity of the polymer is beneficial because it prolongs the drainage and cleaning benefits. Another important feature of the preferred polymers is that they leave no residue when dried. The compositions containing the preferred polymers dry more evenly on floors and promote a final result with little or no haze or fog.

Many materials can provide drainage and stain prevention benefits, however the preferred materials are polymers containing hydrophilic amine oxide groups. Polymers containing other hydrophilic groups such as sulfonate, pyrrolidone and/or carboxyl groups can also be used. Examples of desirable polysulfonate polymers include polyvinyl sulfonate and more preferably polystyrene sulfonate such as those sold by Monomer-Polymer Dajac (1675 Bustleton Pike, Feasterville, Pennsylvania 19053). A typical formula is as follows:

-[CH(C ₆ H ₄ SO ₃ Na) - CH ₂ J _n - CH(C ₆ H ₅ ) - CH ₂ -

in which &eegr; represents a number such that the appropriate molecular weight given below is obtained.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -22-

THEPROCTERStGAMBLECOMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Typical molecular weights range from about 10,000 to about 1,000,000, preferably from about 200,000 to about 700,000. Preferred polymers containing pyrrolidone functional groups include polyvinylpyrrolidone, quaternized pyrrolidone derivatives (such as Gafquat 75 5 N from International Specialty Products), and pyrrolidone-containing copolymers such as polyvinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate (available from ISP) and polyvinylpyrrolidone/acrylate (available from BASF). Other materials that also provide substantivity and hydrophilicity include cationic materials that also have hydrophilic groups and polymers containing multiple ether linkages. Cationic materials include cationic sugar and/or starch derivatives, and the typical block copolymer detergent surfactants based on propylene oxide and ethylene oxide are representative of the polyether materials. The polyether materials, however, are less substantive.

The preferred polymers comprise water-soluble amine oxide moieties. It is believed that the partial positive charge of the amine oxide group serves to fix the polymer to the surface of the substrate surface and facilitate water "drainage." The amine oxide moiety can also be hydrogen bonded to hard surface substrates such as ceramic tile, glass, fiberglass, porcelain enamel, linoleum, wax-free tile, and other hard surfaces commonly found in consumer homes. In view of the fact that polymer anchoring promotes better "drainage," higher molecular weight materials are preferred. Increased molecular weight improves the effectiveness and efficiency of the amine oxide-based polymer. The preferred polymers of the present invention have one or more monomer units containing at least one N-oxide group. At least about 10%, preferably more than about 50%, and more preferably more than about 90% of the monomers comprising the polymers contain an amine oxide group. These polymers can be described by the general formula:

P(B)

wherein P represents homopolymerizable and copolymerizable radicals which are bonded together to form the polymer backbone, preferably vinyl radicals, for example C(R)2 - C(R)2, wherein each radical R is H, C ₁ -Ci ₂ (preferably Ci-C^-alkylene), C ₆ -Ci ₂ -aryl(ene) and/or B

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -23-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

B is a radical selected from substituted and unsubstituted, straight-chain and cyclic C 1 -C 12 alkyl, C 1 -C 12 alkylene, C 1 -C 12 heterocyclic groups, aromatic C 6 -C 12 groups and in which at least one of the B radicals has at least one amine oxide group (-N-»O); in which u is a number such that at least about 10% to about 90% of monomers which have an amine oxide group are obtained; and t is a number such that the average molecular weight of the polymer is about 2,000 to about 500,000, preferably about 5,000 to about 250,000 and more preferably about 7,500 to about 200,000.

The preferred polymers of the invention have the unexpected ability to be substantive without leaving a visible residue that would make the substrate surface unsatisfactory to the consumer. The preferred polymers include poly(4-vinylpyridine-N-oxide) polymers (PVNO), i.e., those obtained by the polymerization of monomers containing the following radical:

wherein the average molecular weight of the polymer is from about 2,000 to about 500,000, preferably from about 5,000 to about 400,000, and more preferably from about 7,500 to about 300,000. In general, higher molecular weight polymers are preferred. Often, higher molecular weight polymers allow for the use of lower amounts of the wetting polymer, which can provide advantages in floor cleaner applications. The preferred molecular weight range of polymers useful in the present invention is in contrast to that found in the prior art for polycarboxylate, polystyrene sulfonate, and polyether based additives, which prefer molecular weights in the range of 400,000 to 1,500,000. The lower molecular weights for the preferred polyamine oxide polymers used in the present invention are a result of the greater difficulty in preparing these higher molecular weight polymers.

· · · ·
··· * · •
• • • · · · · • • · ·
·
• * I·· ·
•
• • ·· · «
···· · ·
···· •
• · •
• · · • «
· · • •
» • •
* ·
· •

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -24-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The content of the amine oxide polymer is generally less than about 0.5%, preferably about 0.001% to about 0.4%, and more preferably about 0.01% to about 0.3%, based on the weight of the final composition/solution.

Some non-limiting examples of homopolymers and _copolymers which can be used as water-soluble polymers in the context of the present invention are: adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl-diethylenetriamine copolymers; adipic acid/epoxypropyl-diethylenetriamine copolymers; polyvinyl alcohol; methacryloyl-ethylbetaine/methacrylate copolymers; ethyl acrylate/methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymers; polyamine resins; and polyquaternary amine resins; poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6%-vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12%-vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6%-vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12%-vinylamine hydrochloride). Preferably, the copolymers and/or Homopolymers selected from the group consisting of adipic acid/dimethylaminohydroxypropyl diethylenetriamine copolymers; poly(vinylpyrrolidone/dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate); polyvinyl alcohol; ethyl acrylate/methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid/acrylic acid copolymers; methacryloyl ethyl betaine/methacrylate copolymers; polyquaternary amine resins; poly(ethenylformamide); poly(vinylamine) hydrochloride; poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine); poly(vinyl alcohol-co-6% vinylamine hydrochloride); and poly(vinyl alcohol-co-12% vinylamine hydrochloride).

Polymers suitable for use in the present invention may be selected from the group consisting of copolymers of hydrophilic monomers. The polymer may be a straight chain random or block copolymer or a mixture thereof. The term "hydrophilic" is consistent with its standard meaning of affinity for water. The term "hydrophilic" as used herein with respect to monomer units and polymeric materials including copolymers means substantially water soluble. In this regard, "substantially water soluble" means a material that is soluble in distilled (or equivalent) water at 25°C at a concentration of about 0.2% by weight, and preferably soluble at about 1% by weight. The terms "soluble", "solubility" and the like in this context correspond to the maximum concentration of the monomer or polymer in question that

, i &igr;.;;

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -25-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

can be dissolved in water or other solvents to form a homogeneous solution, as is also readily understandable for the person skilled in the art ;·. {

is. t ,

Non-limiting examples of useful hydrophilic monomers are unsaturated organic mono- and polycarboxylic acids such as acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, crotonic acid, maleic acid and its half esters, itaconic acid; unsaturated alcohols such as vinyl alcohol, allyl alcohol; polar vinyl heterocycles such as vinyl caprolactam, vinyl pyridine, vinyl imidazole; vinyl amine; vinyl sulfonate; unsaturated amides such as acrylamides, for example N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N-tert-butylacrylamide; hydroxyethyl methacrylate; dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate; salts of the acids and amines listed above; and the like; and mixtures thereof. Some preferred hydrophilic monomers are acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, N,N-dimethylacrylamide, N,N-dimethylmethacrylamide, N-tert-butylacrylamide, dimethylaminoethyl methacrylate and mixtures thereof.

Polycarboxylate polymers are those formed by the polymerization of monomers at least some of which contain carboxyl functional groups. Common monomers include acrylic acid, maleic acid, ethylene, vinylpyrrolidone, methacrylic acid, methacryloylethyl betaine, etc. Preferred polymers in terms of substantivity are those with higher molecular weights. For example, polyacrylic acid with molecular weights below about 10,000 is not particularly substantive and therefore does not normally provide the hydrophilicity necessary for three rewettings with all compositions, although at higher levels and/or with certain surface active agents such as amphoteric and/or zwitterionic detergent surfactants, some results can be achieved with molecular weights up to about 1000. In general, the polymers should have molecular weights greater than about 10,000, preferably greater than about 20,000, more preferably greater than about 300,000, and even more preferably greater than about 400,000. It has further been found that higher molecular weight polymers, for example those having molecular weights greater than about 3,000,000, are extremely difficult to formulate and less effective in providing antistain benefits than lower molecular weight polymers. Accordingly, particularly for polyacrylates, the molecular weight should be from about 20,000 to about 3,000,000, preferably from about 20,000 to about 2,500,000; more preferably from about 300,000 to about 2,000,000; and even more preferably about 400,000 to about 1,500,000.

·

·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -26-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

An advantage of some polycarboxylate polymers is the effectiveness of such polymers as detergent builders. Although such polymers may not have the «· _# *;

♦♦· affect film formation/streaking, they lead like other detergents _tt

Builder leads to increased cleaning effectiveness for typical "ordinarily difficult to remove" soiling that contains certain particulate materials.

Some polymers, particularly polycarboxylate polymers, thicken the compositions which are aqueous liquids. This may be desirable. However, when the compositions are placed in containers equipped with pressure spray devices or used in cleaning equipment which includes a liquid dispensing system as described below in Section VA, the compositions are desirably not so thick as to require excessive squeezing or pumping pressure . Typically, the viscosity under shear should be less than about 200 cP, preferably less than about 100 cP, and more preferably less than about 50 cP.

Non-limiting examples of polymers to be used in the present invention include poly(vinylpyrrolidone/acrylic acid) sold under the name "Acrylidone"® by ISP and poly(acrylic acid) sold under the name "Accumer"® by Rohm & Haas. Other suitable materials include sulfonated polystyrene polymers sold under the name Versaflex® by National Starch and Chemical Company, particularly Versaflex 7000.

The level of the polymeric material is normally less than about 0.5%, preferably from about 0.001% to about 0.4%, and more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.3%. In general, lower molecular weight materials such as low molecular weight poly(acrylic acid), i.e. those having molecular weights below about 10,000 and especially about 2,000, do not provide good antistaining performance upon rewetting, particularly when using low levels, for example about 0.02%. Only the more effective materials should be used at the lower levels. To use lower molecular weight materials, one should increase the substantivity, i.e. introduce groups which provide improved adhesion to the surface, such as cationic groups, or one should use the materials at higher levels, for example more than about 0.05.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -27-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

C. Organic solvent to be used if necessary

The compositions may optionally also contain one or more organic cleaning solvents in effective amounts which may be

typically not less than about 0.25% and at least, in increasing ;***';

in order of preference, about 0.5% and about 3.0% and not ^

more than about, in increasing order of preference, about 7% and '

about 5% by weight of the composition. »

The surfactant causes cleaning and/or wetting #

even without the presence of a hydrophobic cleaning solvent. However, cleaning can usually be further improved by using the correct organic cleaning solvent. An organic cleaning solvent is an agent which assists the surfactant in removing soils normally found in the kitchen or bathroom. The organic cleaning solvent may also, if required, assist in improving the viscosity, increasing the stability of the composition and/or improving the wetting properties of the cleaning solution. The compositions containing C8-i6 alkyl polyglucosides and C8-i4 alkyl ethoxylates also exhibit lower foaming when a solvent is present. Thus, the foam profile can be controlled to a large extent by simply controlling the level of hydrophobic solvent in the formulation.

Such solvents typically have a terminal C3-C6 hydrocarbon group attached to one to three ethylene glycol or propylene glycol residues to provide an appropriate level of hydrophobicity and preferably surface activity. Examples of commercially available hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on ethylene glycol chemistry include monoethylene glycol n-hexyl ether (Hexyl Cellosolve®, available from Union Carbide). Examples of commercially available hydrophobic cleaning solvents based on propylene glycol chemistry include di- and tri-propylene glycol derivatives of propyl and butyl alcohol available from Arco Chemical (3801 West Chester Pike, Newtown Square, PA 19073) and Dow Chemical (1691 N. Swede Road, Midland, Michigan) under the trademarks Arcosolv® and Dowanol®.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -28-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Solvents preferred in the present invention are selected from the group consisting of monopropylene glycol monopropyl ether, dipropylene glycol monopropyl ether, monopropylene glycol monobutyl ether, dipropylene glycol

pylene glycol monopropyl ether, dipropylene glycol monobutyl ether; tripropylene glycol monobutyl ether; ethylene glycol monobutyl ether; diethylene glycol mono- butyl ether, ethylene glycol monohexyl ether and diethylene glycol monohexyle- _&phgr;

♦ ··· *♦■ ether, 3-methoxy-3-methyl-butanol and mixtures thereof. The term "butyl" includes η-butyl, isobutyl and tert-butyl groups. _{Monopropylene} glycol and monopropylene glycol monobutyl ether are the most preferred cleaning solvents and are available under the trademarks Dowanol DPnP® and Dowanol DPnB®. Dipropylene glycol mono-tert-butyl ether is commercially available from Arco Chemical under the trademark Arcosolv PTB®. In certain cases it may be preferable to use combinations of these cleaning solvents, for example hexyl cellusolve with butyl cellusolve or Dowanol PnB with 3-methoxy-3-methyl-butanol.

Highly preferred solvents for incorporation into the present compositions are selected based on the boiling point of the solvent to minimize filming and/or streaking on the surface being cleaned. Solvents having a boiling point of at least about 120 ^° C, preferably at least about 130 ^° C, more preferably at least about 140 ^° C and not greater than about 180 ^° C, preferably not greater than about 170°C, more preferably not greater than about 160 ^° C have been found to provide excellent results in minimizing filming and/or streaking left on the surface being treated, particularly in a no-rinse cleaning process. A particularly preferred solvent for incorporation into the present compositions is a glycol ether solvent having a boiling point of from about 140 ^° C to about 160 ^° C.

The amount of organic cleaning solvent may vary depending on the amount of other ingredients present in the composition. The hydrophobic cleaning solvent is usually helpful in achieving good cleaning, such as in floor cleaning applications.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -29-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

D. Mono- and polycarboxylic acids to be used if necessary

For the purpose of removing and/or preventing stains caused by _f , soap deposits and hard water, the compositions may be made acidic * _t having a pH of from about 2 to about 5, preferably about 3. ;**"*· The acidity is at least partially achieved by the use of one or more- _{t #}

♦···♦* organic acids having a pKa of less than about 5, preferably *

less than about 4. Such organic acids can, in addition to removing stains caused by hard water, also perform necessary cleaning tasks.

• · t if they assist in phase formation for thickening purposes. Organic acids in the compositions of the invention have been found to be very effective in promoting good hard water stain removal properties. It has also been found that a low pH and the use of one or more suitable acids also provide disinfecting benefits.

Examples of suitable monocarboxylic acids include acetic acid, glycolic acid, or ß-hydroxypropionic acid, and the like. Examples of suitable polycarboxylic acids include citric acid, tartaric acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, and mixtures thereof. Such acids are readily available commercially. Examples of more preferred polycarboxylic acids, particularly non-polymeric polycarboxylic acids, include citric acid (available from Aldrich Corporation, 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, Wisconsin), a mixture of succinic acid, glutaric acid, and adipic acid available from DuPont (Wilmington, Delaware) sold under the designation "Refined AGS di-basic acids," maleic acid (also available from Aldrich), and mixtures thereof. Citric acid is most preferred, particularly for applications requiring cleaning of soap scum. Glycolic acid and its mixture with adipic acid, glutaric acid and succinic acid provide enhanced benefits in removing hard water stains. The amount of organic acid in the present compositions can range from about 0.01% to about 1%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, even more preferably from about 0.025% to about 0.25% by weight of the composition.

J.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - so -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

E. Odour control agents to be used if necessary

The term "cyclodextrin" as used herein means any of the known cyclodextrins, such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins containing six to twelve

Contain glucose units, in particular alpha-cyclodextrin, beta-cyclodextrin ,

trin, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives and/or mixtures thereof. The _tt

alpha-cyclodextrin consists of six glucose units, beta-cyclodextrin *

consists of seven glucose units and the gamma-cyclodextrin consists of »**'*·

eight glucose units arranged in torus-shaped rings. The specific « *

· t fic coupling and conformation of the glucose units gives the cyclodextrins a rigid, conical molecular structure with a hollow interior of a specific volume. The "lining" of each internal cavity is formed by hydrogen atoms and glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms, so that this surface is quite hydrophobic. The unique shape and physicochemical properties of the cavity allow the cyclodextrin molecules to absorb organic molecules or parts of organic molecules that fit into the cavity (forming inclusion complexes). Many odorous molecules, including many malodorous molecules and fragrance molecules, fit into the cavity. Consequently, cyclodextrins and especially mixtures of cyclodextrins with cavities of different sizes can be used to control odors caused by a wide range of organic odorous materials, optionally containing reactive functional groups. Complex formation between cyclodextrin and odorous molecules occurs rapidly in the presence of water. However, the extent of complex formation also depends on the polarity of the absorbed molecules. In an aqueous solution, highly hydrophilic molecules (those that are highly water soluble) are only partially, if at all, absorbed. Consequently, cyclodextrin does not effectively complex some very low molecular weight organic amines and acids when they are present in small amounts on moist surfaces. However, when the water is removed, for example by drying the surface, some low molecular weight organic amines and acids show greater affinity and complex more easily with the cyclodextrins.

The voids within the cyclodextrin in the solution of the present invention should, when the cyclodextrin is in solution, be substantially unfilled (i.e., the cyclodextrin is uncomplexed) in order to

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 31 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

cause the cyclodextrin to absorb various odor molecules when the solution is applied to a surface. Non-derivative (normal) beta-cyclodextrin may be present up to a level up to its solubility limit of about 1.85% (about 1.85 g in 100 g water) at room temperature. beta-cyclodextrin is not present in compositions «···*.

preferred which require a cyclodextrin content higher than the ****

Solubility limit in water. Beta-Cyclodex- not in derivative form ·*****

• trin is generally not preferred when the composition contains an upper ,···».

surfactant because it increases the surface activity of the majority of the *'** ♦ · preferred surfactants which are used with the derivatized cyclodextrins.

are compatible with the body.

Preferably, the cyclodextrins used according to the invention are highly water-soluble, such as alpha-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof, derivatized beta-cyclodextrins and/or mixtures thereof. The derivatives of cyclodextrin consist predominantly of molecules in which some of the OH groups have been converted to OR groups. Cyclodextrin derivatives include, for example, those with short alkyl groups, such as methylated cyclodextrins and ethylated cyclodextrins, in which R represents a methyl or an ethyl group; those with hydroxyalkyl substituent groups, such as hydroxypropyl cyclodextrins and/or hydroxyethyl cyclodextrins, in which R represents a -CH ₂ -CH(OH)-CH ₃ or a -CH ₂ CH ₂ -OH group; branched cyclodextrins, such as cyclodextrins bound to maltose; cationic cyclodextrins such as those containing 2-hydroxy-3-(dimethylamino)propyl ether wherein R represents CH2-CH(OH)-CH2-N(CH3)2 which is cationic at low pH; quaternary ammonium groups, for example 2-hydroxy-3-(trimethylammonium)propyl ether chloride groups wherein R represents _CH2 -CH(OH) _-CH2 -N ⁺ ( _CH3 ) _3Cr ; anionic cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl cyclodextrins, cyclodextrin sulfates and cyclodextrin succinylates; amphoteric cyclodextrins such as carboxymethyl/quaternary ammonium cyclodextrins; Cyclodextrins in which at least one glucopyranose unit has a 3-6-anhydro-cyclomalto structure, for example the mono-3-6-anhydrocyclodextrins as described in "Optimal Performances with Minimal Chemical Modification of Cyclodextrins", F. Diedaini-Pilard, and B. Perly, The 7th International Cyclodextrin Symposium Abstracts, April 1994, p. 49, which references are hereby incorporated by reference, and mixtures thereof. Other cyclodextrin derivatives are described in US Patent Nos.: 3,426,011, on

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -32-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Feb. 4, 1969 to Parmerter et al.; 3,453,257; 3,453,258; 3,453,259; and 3,453,260, all issued July 1, 1969 to Parmerter et al.; U *. 3,459,731 issued Aug. 5, 1969 to Gramera et al.; 3,553,191 issued _Jan. 5, 1971 to Parmerter et al.; 3,565,887 issued Feb. 23, 1971 to Parmerter et al.

al.; 4,535,152 on August 13, 1985 to Szejtli et al.; 4,616,008 on October 7, 1986 to Hirai et al.; 4,678,598 on July 7, 1987 to Ogino et al.

shares; 4,638,058 on Jan. 20, 1987 to Brandt et al.; and 4,746,734 on *"**'

May 24, 1988 to Tsuchiyama et al., all of which patents are incorporated herein by reference.

Highly water-soluble cyclodextrins are those having a water solubility of at least about 10 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature, preferably at least about 20 g in 100 ml of water, and more preferably at least about 25 g in 100 ml of water at room temperature. The availability of dissolved, uncomplexed cyclodextrins is essential for effective and efficient odor control. Solubilized, water-soluble cyclodextrin may provide more effective odor control than non-water-soluble cyclodextrin when these materials are applied to surfaces.

Examples of preferred water-soluble cyclodextrin derivatives that can be used herein are hydroxypropyl-alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated alpha-cyclodextrin, methylated beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl-beta-cyclodextrin, and hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin. Hydroxyalkyl-cyclodextrin derivatives preferably have a degree of substitution of from about 1 to about 14, more preferably from about 1.5 to about 7, with the total number of OR groups per cyclodextrin being defined as the degree of substitution. Methylated cyclodextrin derivatives typically have a degree of substitution of from about 1 to about 18, preferably from about 3 to about 16. A known methylated beta-cyclodextrin is heptakis-2,6-di-O-methyl-ß-cyclodextrin, commonly known as DIMEB, in which each glucose unit has about 2 methyl groups for a degree of substitution of about 14. A preferred and more commonly available commercially methylated beta-cyclodextrin is a randomly methylated beta-cyclodextrin, commonly known as RAMEB, which has varying degrees of substitution, usually about 12.6. RAMEB is more preferred than DIMEB because DIMEB affects the surface activity of the preferred surfactants more than RAMEB. The preferred cyclodextrins are available, for example, from Cerestar USA, Inc. and

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -33-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Wacker Chemicals (USA), Inc.

It is further preferred to use a mixture of cyclodextrins ♦· *j

Such mixtures absorb odors on a broader scale through grain _{t #}

plexing a larger range of odorous molecules with a larger *

range of molecular sizes. Preferably, at least a portion of the cyclodextrin is alpha-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof, gamma-cyclodextrin and/or derivatives thereof and/or derivatized beta-cyclodextrin, or

preferably a mixture of alpha-cyclodextrin or an alpha-cyclodextrin,*♦♦”

» « trin derivative, and derivatized beta-cyclodextrin, and more preferably a J***.

Mixture of derivatized alpha-cyclodextrin and derivatized beta-cyclodextrin and most preferably a mixture of hydroxypropyl-alpha-cyclodextrin and hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin and/or a mixture of methylated alpha-cyclodextrin and methylated beta-cyclodextrin.

It is preferred that the compositions of the invention to be used contain low levels of cyclodextrin so that no visible residue occurs at normal application levels. Preferably, the solution used to treat the surface under use conditions is virtually undetectable when dry. Typical cyclodextrin levels in use compositions for use conditions range from about 0.01% to about 1%, preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.75%, more preferably from about 0.1% to about 0.5%, by weight of the composition. Compositions with higher concentrations may leave unacceptable visible residues.

F. Peroxide sources to be used if necessary

The compositions of the present invention may contain peroxide, such as hydrogen peroxide, or a source of hydrogen peroxide for disinfection and fungistatic and fungicidal effects. The ingredients of the present composition are substantially compatible with the use of peroxides. Preferred peroxides include benzoyl peroxide and hydrogen peroxide. These may optionally be present in the present compositions in amounts of from about 0.05% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.1% to about 3%, even more preferably from about 0.2% to about 1.5%.

If a peroxide is present, it is preferred to use a stabilizing system

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -34-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

system. Suitable stabilization systems are known. A preferred stabilization system consists of radical scavengers and/or metal chelators present in amounts of from about 0.01 % to about 0.5%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.25%, even more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1 _% , based on the weight of the composition. Examples of radical scavengers include antioxidants such as propyl gallate, butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), and the like. Examples of suitable metal chelators include diethylenetriamine pentaacetate, diethylenetriamine pentamethylenephosphonate, hydroxyethyl diphosphonate, and the like.

G. Thickening polymer, if used

Low levels of polymer can also be used to thicken the preferred aqueous compositions of the present invention. Generally, the level of thickening polymer is kept as low as possible so as not to affect the final properties of the product. Xanthan gum is a particularly preferred thickening agent because it can also improve the final properties, especially when used at low levels. The thickening polymer agent is present in amounts of from about 0.001% to about 0.1%, more preferably from about 0.0025% to about 0.05 %, even more preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.025% by weight of the composition.

H. Aqueous solvent system

The aqueous preparations contain at least about 80% of the aqueous solvent by weight of the composition, more preferably about 80% to greater than 99% by weight of the composition. The aqueous compositions are typically in micellar form and do not contain substantial amounts of water-insoluble components which cause significant swelling of the micelles.

The aqueous solvent system may also contain low molecular weight, highly water-soluble solvents typically used in detergent compositions, for example ethanol, isopropanol, etc. These solvents may be used to add

·

« I

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -35-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

which otherwise contain a low content of active compounds, with disinfectant properties. In addition, they can be particularly beneficial

be in compositions where the total fragrance content is very low. In fact, highly volatile solvents can cause "carryover _" and enhance the character of the fragrance. Highly volatile solvents are, ;****;

• ·· · when present, typically in amounts of from about 0.25% to about 5%, more preferably from about 0.5% to about 3%, most preferably from about 0.5% to about 2%, by weight of the composition.

Examples of such solvents include methanol, ethanol, isopropanol, n-butanol, isobutanol, 2-butanol, pentanol, 2-methyl-l-butanol, methoxymethanol, methoxyethanol, methoxypropanol and mixtures thereof.

The aqueous solvent system preferably comprises water, more preferably soft water and most preferably deionized water. The use of deionized or distilled water eliminates problems such as undesirable film formation and/or streaking as an end result of the treatment due to the deposition of minerals contained in the hard water. This water enables the use of anionic ingredients in the formulation (such as surfactants and polymers) without the potential difficulties of precipitation of these active ingredients with calcium and/or magnesium.

The compositions according to the invention may also contain other solvents and in particular paraffins and isoparaffins, which are capable of greatly reducing the foams caused by the composition.

I. Foam suppressor to be used if necessary

The suitable silicone suds suppressors to be used herein include any silicone and silica-silicone blends. Silicones can be represented generally by alkylated polysiloxane materials, while silica is normally used in finely divided form, examples of which are silica aerogels and xerogels and hydrophobic silicas of various types. In industrial practice, the term "silicone" has become a generic term that encompasses a variety of relatively high molecular weight polymers containing siloxane units and hydroxycarbyl groups of various types. In fact,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -36-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Silicone compounds are widely described in the prior art, including US patents: US 4,076,648; US 4,021,365; US ··. *J

4,749,740; US 4,983,316 and the European patents: EP 150 872; EP , , 217 501; and EP 499 364, to which patents express reference is made. Preferred are polydiorganosiloxanes, such as polydimethylsiloxanes with trimethylsilyl end blocking groups and a viscosity at ^{25 0} _C of 5 x 10" ⁵ m ² /s to 0.1 m ² /s, ie a value of η in the range

from 40 to 1500. These compounds are preferred due to their good availability »"···„ and their relatively low cost. *"*"♦

A preferred type of silicone compound useful in the present compositions comprises a mixture of an alkylated siloxane of the type described above and solid silica. The solid silica may be fumed silica, precipitated silica or a silica prepared by a gelation technique. The silica particles may be rendered hydrophobic by treatment with dialkylsilyl groups and/or trialkylsilane groups bonded directly to the silica or via a silicone resin. A preferred silicone compound comprises a hydrophobically silanated, most preferably trimethylsilanated, silica having a particle size in the range of 10 mm to 20 mm and a specific surface area of greater than 50 m ² /g. The silicone compounds used in the compositions according to the invention suitably have a silicon dioxide content in the range of 1 to 30 wt.% (more preferably 2.0 to 15 wt.%), based on the total weight of the silicone compounds leading to silicone compounds having an average viscosity in the range of 2 x 10' ⁴ m ² /s to 1 m ² /s. Preferred silicone compounds can have a viscosity in the range of 5 x 10' ³ m ² /s to 0.1 m ² s. Silicone compounds having a viscosity of 2 x 10' ² m ² /s or 4.5 x 10" ² m ² /s are particularly suitable.

Silicone compounds useful in the present invention are commercially available from various sources including Rhone Poulenc, Fueller and Dow Corning. Examples of silicone compounds useful herein are Silicone DB® 100 and Silicone Emulsion 2-3597®, both of which are commercially available from Dow Corning.

Fatty acids, typically those used in laundry cleaning products, can be used to suppress foaming in such solutions.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -37-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

J. Fragrance to be used if necessary

Jm • (

The present compositions optionally, but preferably, contain certain fragrances or perfumes to achieve a positive

fragrance signal to the user during use of the present .****# compositions, cleaning pads and/or cleaning devices. The present

Preferred compositions typically contain low *

Surfactant contents, in which case a careful selection '··'

of the fragrance materials typically required to produce a fragrance material I"

al that is both soluble in the low surfactant composition and yet produces a positive scent signal. The fragrance is typically incorporated in an amount of from about 0.005% to about 0.20%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.15%, more preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.08%, and even more preferably from about 0.03% to about 0.06%, by weight of the hard surface cleaning composition.

The ratio of surfactant to fragrance in the present compositions typically ranges from about 20:1 to about 1:50, and more preferably from about 1:1 to about 1:4.

For the purposes of the present invention, the optional perfume material includes perfume materials characterized by their boiling point (bp) and their octanol/water partition coefficient (P). The octanol/water partition coefficient of a perfume ingredient is the ratio between its equilibrium concentrations in octanol and in water. The boiling points of the perfume ingredients referred to herein are determined at the normal standard pressure of about 760 mmHg. Since the partition coefficients of the preferred perfume ingredients of the present invention have high values, they are more conveniently expressed in terms of their logarithm of base 10, logP, at 25°C.

The boiling points of a variety of fragrance ingredients can be found in the following sources:

Properties of Organic Compounds Database CD-ROM Ver. 5.0
CRC Press

Boca Raton, Florida

.:♦♦

TER MEER STEI N M EISTE R & PARTNER GbR -38-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Flavor and Fragrance - 1995

Aldrich Chemical Co. ··. *·

Milwaukee, Wisconsin ,

STN Database/on-line ! I

Design Institute of for Physical Property Data

ff·**· American Institute of Chemical Engineers *

STN Database /online
Beilstein Handbook of
Beilstein Information Systems

• · Beilstein Handbook of Organic Chemistry ·" ··

Perfume and Flavor Chemicals
Steffen Arctander
Vol. I, II - 1969

If not specified, the boiling points of fragrance ingredients can be estimated at 760 mmHg. The following computer programs are useful for determining these boiling points: 20

MPBPVP Version 1.25 © 1994-96 Meylan

Syracuse Research Corporation (SRC)

Syracuse, New York

ZPARC

ChemLogic, Inc.
Cambridge, Massachusetts

For example, the logP of a variety of fragrance ingredients is given in the Pomona92 database, available from Daylight Chemical Information Systems, Inc. (Daylight CIS), Irvine, California, and gives a variety of values along with citations to the original literature. However, logP values are most conveniently calculated using the Pamona Med Chem/Daylight "CLOGP" program, version 4.42, available from Biobyte Corporation, Claremont, California. The program also gives experimental logP values when they are available in the Pomona92 database. The "be-

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -39-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

calculated logP" (ClogP) is determined using the fragment approach of Hansch and Leo (see a. Leo, in Comprehensive Medicinal Chemistry, Vol. 4, C. j» _e "·

Hansch, PG Sammens, JB Taylor and Ca. Ramsden, eds., p. 295, _Pergamon Press (1990), incorporated herein by reference). The fragment approach * is based on the chemical structure of each fragrance component and describes the chemical structure of the individual components of the fragrance.

takes into account the number and type of atoms, the atomic combination and the chemical bonding. The ClogP values, which are the most reliable and widely used estimates for the corresponding physico-chemical properties, are preferably used instead of the experimental logP values in the selection of fragrance ingredients useful in the invention.

The present fragrance materials are defined herein according to their boiling point and ClogP value as follows: volatile hydrophilic fragrance materials; volatile hydrophobic fragrance materials; residual hydrophilic fragrance materials; residual hydrophobic fragrance materials.

i. Volatile, hydrophilic fragrance materials

Volatile, hydrophilic fragrance materials have a boiling point of less than about 250 ^° C and a ClogP of less than about 3. These materials tend to be quite soluble in the present hard surface cleaning compositions, even those having relatively high levels of water and low levels of surfactants. These materials impart some odor to the solution and the room containing the treated surfaces. Volatile, hydrophilic fragrance materials tend to evaporate with the water contained in the present compositions, imparting some odor to the room containing the treated surfaces. However, these materials do not tend to leave visible film residues and/or streaks on the treated surfaces. As a result, volatile hydrophilic fragrance materials typically make up a relatively large portion of the fragrances present, typically in amounts of about 0.05% to about 90%, preferably about 1% to about 70%, more preferably about 5% to about 60%, and even more preferably about 10% to about 50%, by weight of the fragrance.

Examples of volatile, hydrophilic fragrance materials are those in

TER MEER STEIN'mEIST^R 't PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM

1 as specified in Table 1 below:

Table Examples of volatile, hydrophilic fragrance materials

Fragrance material Allyl caproate ClogP
(estimated) boiling point
(measured) boiling point
(estimated) Amyl acetate (n-pentyl acetate) 2.87 186 Amyl propionate 2.30 147 &rgr;-Anisaldehyd 2.83 169 Anisole 1.78 249 Benzaldehyde (benzenecarboxaldehyde) 2.06 154 Benzyl acetate 1.50 179 Benzylacetone 1.96 211 Benzyl alcohol 1.74 234 Benzyl formate 1.10 205 Benzyl isovalerate 1.50 203 Benzyl propionate 3.42 256 beta-gamma-hexenol (2-hexen-1-oil) 2.49 221 (+)-Camphor 1.40 164 (+)-Carvon 2.18 207 L-Carvon 2.01 231 Cinnamon alcohol 2.01 230 Cinnamyl formate 1.41 258 cis-Jasmon 1.91 252 cis-3-hexenyl acetate 2.64 253 Citral (Neral) 2.34 175 Cuminyl alcohol 2.95 208 Cuminaldehyd 2.53 249 Cyclal (2,4-Dimethyl-3-cyclohexene-l-
carboxaldehyd 2.92 235 Dimethylbenzylcarbinol 2.36 203 Dimethylbenzylcarbinyl acetate 1.89 215 Ethyl acetate 2.84 248 Ethyl acetoacetate 0.71 77 Ethyl amyl ketone 0.33 181 Ethyl benzoate 2.44 167 2.64 215

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 41 21.01.2003

Ethyl butanoate 1.77 121 233 1 3-Nonanone (Ethylhexyl ketone) 2.97 187 250 Ethyl phenyl acetate 2.35 228 Eucalyptol 2.76 176 Eugenol 2.40 253 5 Fenchyl alcohol 2.58 199 Floracetate (tricyclodecenyl acetate) 2.36 Fruten (tricyclodecenyl propionate) 2.89 233 gamma-nonalacetone 2.77 243 trans-geraniol 2.77 230 10 cis-3-Hexen-l-ol /Leaf alcohol 1.40 156 Hexyl acetate 2.83 171 237 Hexyl formate 2.38 155 231 Hydratropic alcohol 1.58 Hydroxycitronellal 1.54 241 204 15 Indole (2,3-benzopyrrole) 2.13 254 Isoamyl alcohol 1.22 131 223 Isopropyl phenyl acetate 2.66 212 Isopulegol 2.75 214 Isoquinoline (benzopyridine) 1.82 243 20 Ligustral (2,4-dimethyl-3-cyclohexene-1-
carboxaldehyde) 2.36 Linalool 2.55 193 Linalool oxide 1.45 Linalyl formate 3.05 216 Menthone 2.83 25 4-Methylacetophenone 2.08 226 Methyl pentyl ketone 1.91 151 Methyl anthranilate 2.02 256 Methyl benzoate 2.11 199 Methyl-phenyl-carbinyl-acetat
(alpha-methylbenzyl acetate) 2.27 30 Methyl eugenol (eugenyl methyl ether) 2.67 254 Methyl heptone (6-methyl-5-hepten-2-one) 1.82 173 Methylheptine carbonate (methyl 2-octynoate) 2.57 218 Methylheptylketone 2.97 195 35 Methylhexyl ketone 2.44 173

·

·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY

Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 42 21.01.2003

Methyl salicylate 2.45 223 226 Dimethylanthranilate 2.16 255 1 Neroli 2.77 225 delta-nonalacetone 2.80 gamma-octalacetone 2.24 256 2-octanol 2.72 180 5 Octylaldehyde (caprylaldehyde) 2.95 167 p-Cresol 1.97 202 p-Cresyl methyl ether 2.56 175 Acetanisole 1.80 258 2-Phenoxyethanol 1.19 245 10 Phenylacetaldehyd 1.78 195 257 2 - Phenylaethyl acetate 2.13 235 150 Phenethyl alcohol 1.18 218 Phenylethyldimethylcarbinol (Benzyl -
tert-butanol) 2.42 15 Prenyl acetate 1.68 197 Propyl butanoate 2.30 143 (+)-Pulegone 2.50 224 Rose oxide 2.90 Safrole 2.57 235 20 4-Terpinenol 2.75 211 Terpinolene (alpha-terpineol) 2.63 219 Veratrol (1,2-dimethoxybenzene) 1.60 206 Viridin (phenylacetaldehyde dimethyl acetal) 1.29 220

ii.

Volatile, hydrophobic fragrance materials

Volatile, hydrophobic fragrance materials have a boiling point of less than about 250 ^° C and a ClogP of greater than about 3. These materials tend to be relatively insoluble in the present hard surface cleaning compositions, but are typically capable of providing strong positive fragrance signals in that they tend to be highly volatile and readily diffuse from the hard surface cleaning composition. These fragrance materials are highly desirable in the present composition because they provide a strong fragrance both in solution and in the space containing the surfaces being treated.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM

1 substance signal. Volatile, hydrophobic fragrance materials are generally present in relatively large amounts in the present compositions, of at least about 0.2%, preferably at least about 8%, more preferably at least about 14%, and even more preferably

5 preferably at least about 50%, based on the weight of the fragrance.

Examples of volatile hydrophobic fragrance materials include those listed in Table 2 below:

Table 2 Examples of volatile, hydrophobic fragrance materials

Fragrance material Allo-ocimen ClogP
(estimated) boiling point
(measured) boiling point
(estimated) Allylcyclohexanepropionate 4.36 195 Allylheptanoate 3.94 252 trans-anethole 3.40 209 Benzyl butyrate 3.31 232 Camphen 3.02 240 Cadines 4.18 160 Carvacrol 7.27 252 ice - 3 - hexenyl tiglate 3.40 238 Citronellol 3.80 225 Citronellyl acetate 3.25 223 Citronellyl nitrile 4.20 234 Citronellyl propionate 3.09 226 Cyclohexylethyl acetate 4.73 257 Decylaldehyde (capraldehyde) 3.36 222 Dihydromyrcenol 4.01 208 Dihydromyrcenyl acetate 3.03 192 3,7-Dimethyl-l-octanol 3.98 221 Diphenyl oxide 3.74 205 Fenchyl acetate (1,3,3-trimethyl-2-nor-
bornanyl acetate) 4.24 259 Geranyl acetate 3.53 234 Geranyl formate 3.72 233 3.27 231

• f

·

*· »at

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY

Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 44 21.01.2003

Geranyl nitrile 3.25 228 204 cis-3-hexenyl isobutyrate 3.27 213 Hexyl neopentanoate 4.06 221 Hexyl tiglate 4.28 alpha-Ionone 3.71 237 Isobornyl acetate 3.53 238 Isobutyl benzoate 3.57 242 220 Isononyl acetate 4.28 Isononyl alcohol {3,5,5-trimethyl-1-hexa-
nol) 3.08 194 243 Isopulegyl acetate 3.70 Lauraldehyde 5.07 250 d-Limonen 4.35 177 230 Linalyl acetate 3.50 (-) -L -menthyl acetate 4.18 227 Methylchavicol (estragole) 3.13 216 Methyl-n-nonylacetaldehyde 4.85 247 224 Methyloctylacetaldehyd 4.32 165 beta-myrcene 4.33 Neryl acetate 3.72 236 Nonyl acetate 4.41 229 Nonaldehyd 3.48 191 p-Cymen 4.07 173 alpha-pinene 4.18 156 beta-pinene 4.18 166 alpha-terpinene 4.41 175 ganinia-Terpinen 4.35 183 alpha-terpinyl acetate 3.58 220 Tetrahydrolinalool 3.52 202 Tetrahydromyrcenol 3.52 195 235 2-Undecenal 4.22 239 Verdox (o-tert-butylcyclohexyl acetate) 4.06 237 Vertenex (4-tert-butylcyclohexyl acetate) 4.06

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY

Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 45 21.01.2003

iii. Residual hydrophilic fragrance materials

Residual hydrophilic fragrance materials have a boiling point greater than about 250 ^° C and a ClogP of less than about 3. These fragrance materials tend to be relatively soluble in compositions containing relatively high levels of water and low levels of surfactants. These materials do not produce a significant fragrance signal from solution. Furthermore, these materials tend to leave visible films and/or streaks on the surfaces treated, particularly when used in non-rinse cleaning processes, which may be unacceptable to consumers. As a result, these residual hydrophilic fragrance materials are typically incorporated into the present compositions at relatively low levels. Residual hydrophilic fragrance materials are typically incorporated into the present compositions in amounts of less than about 10%, preferably less than about 3%, more preferably less than about 0.7%, and even more preferably less than about 0.01%, by weight of the fragrance.

Examples of residual hydrophilic fragrance materials include those listed in Table 3 below:

Table 3 Examples of residual hydrophilic fragrance materials

Fragrance material Coumarin ClogP
(estimated) boiling point
(measured) boiling point
(estimated) Ethylmethylphenylglycidate 1.41 302 Ethylvanillin 2.71 274 Isoeugenol 1.80 285 Methyl cinnamate 2.58 266 Methyldihydrojasmonat 2.47 262 Methyl-beta-naphthyl ketone 2.42 314 Phenoxyethyl isobutyrate 2.76 302 Vanillin 2.92 277 1.28 285

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM

iv.

Residual hydrophobic fragrance materials

Residual hydrophobic fragrance materials have a boiling point greater than about 250 ^° C and a ClogP greater than about 3. These materials tend to be quite insoluble in compositions having relatively high water contents. The level of residual hydrophobic fragrance materials should be kept as low as possible since such materials typically tend to leave visible films and/or streaks on the treated surfaces, which is unacceptable to consumers, particularly in non-rinse cleaning processes. These fragrance materials continue to provide little positive odor signal from solution. However, residual hydrophobic fragrance materials provide minimal odor signal when treating surfaces with the present compositions, but this benefit is offset by visually visible films and/or streaks left behind by these materials.

Residual hydrophobic fragrance materials are typically incorporated into the present fragrances in amounts of less than about 10%, preferably less than about 5%, more preferably less than about 1%, and even more preferably less than about 0.01%, by weight of the fragrance.

Examples of residual hydrophobic fragrance materials include those listed in Table 4 below:

Table 4 Examples of residual hydrophobic fragrance materials

Fragrance material ClogP
(estimated) boiling point
(measured) boiling point
(estimated) (Ambrettolide) Oxacycloheptadec-10-en-
2-on 6.36 352 (Amyl benzoate) n-Pentyl benzoate 4.23 263 Isoamylcinnamate 4.45 300 alpha-amylcinnamaldehyde 4.32 289 alpha-amylcinnamaldehyde dimethyl acetal 4.03 320 (iso-amyl salicylate) isopentyl salicylate 4.43 277 (Aurantiol) Methyl Anthanilate/Hydroxyci-
tronellal-Schiff base 4.22 413

·

• t

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY

Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 47 21.01.2003

Benzophenone 3.18 305 263 Benzyl salicylate 4.21 320 274 beta-caryophyllene 6.45 289 Cedrol 4.53 387 Cedryl acetate 5.48 266 Cinnamyl cinnamate 4.64 327 Citronellyl isobutyrate 5.04 271 Cyclohexyl salicylate 4.48 279 Cyclamen aldehyde 3.46 314 delta-dodecalactone 4.39 (Dihydroisojasmonate) Methyl-2-hexyl-3-
oxo - cyclopentanc arboxylate 3.09 390 Diphenylmethan 4.06 265 Ethylene brassylate 4.62 307 Ethyl undecylenate 4.99 261 338 Iso-E-Super 4.85 335 (Exaltolide) Pentadecanolide 6.29 278 (galaxolide) 4,6,6,7,8,8-hexamethyl-
1,3,4,6,7,8-hexahydro-cyclopenta(G)-2-
benzopyran 6.06 295 gamma-methyl ionone (alpha-isomethyl
ionone) 4.02 352 Gernylisobutyrate 5.00 323 Hexadecanolide 6.85 334 cis-3-hexenyl salicylate 4.61 318 alpha- hexylcinnamaldehyde 4.85 279 n-Hexyl salicylate 5.09 294 alpha-iron 4.23 282 6-Isobutylquinoline 3.99 325 Lilial (p-tert-butyl-alpha-methyldihydro-
cinnamaldehyde, PT Bucinol) 3.86 Linalyl benzoate 5.42 355 2-methoxynaphthalene) beta-naphthylme-
ethyl ether 3.24 274 317 10-Oxahexadecanolide 4.38 333 Patchouli alcohol 4.53 (Phantolide) 5-Acetyl-1,1,2,3,3,6-hexame-
thylindane 5.69

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM

Phenethyl benzoate 4.06 286 335 Phenethylphenylacetat 3.77 350 Phenylhexanol (3-Methyl-5-phenyl-1 -
pentanol) 3.17 296 Tonalide (7-acetyl-l,l,3,4,4,6-hexame-
ethyltetralin) 6.25 344 delta-undecalactone 3.86 262 gamma-undecalactone 3.83 Vetinert acetate 5.47 332

v.

Fragrance materials with low odour detection limit

The present compositions may also contain low to moderate levels of low odor detection limit materials, either in solution in the aqueous phase to the limit of their water solubility or by incorporation into an emulsion or dispersion together with the other hydrophobic fragrance ingredients. The odor detection limit is the lowest vapor concentration at which material can be detected by odor. The odor detection limit and some odor detection limits are given, for example, in "Standardized Human Olfactory Thresholds", M. Devos et al., IRL Press at Oxford University Press (1990), and "Compilation of Odor and Taste Threshold Values Data", F.A. Fazzalari, ed., ASTM Data Series DS 48A, American Society for Testing and Materials (1978), which references are incorporated herein by reference. The use of small amounts of fragrance ingredients with low odor detection limits can improve the fragrance odor character. Fragrance ingredients having significantly low detection limits and useful in the compositions of the present invention are selected from the group consisting of ambrox, bacdanol, benzyl salicylate, butyl anthranilate, cetalox, damascenone, alpha-damascone, gamma-dodecalactone, ebanol, herbavert, cis-3-hexenyl salicylate, alpha-ionone, beta-ionone, alpha-isomethyl ionone, lilial, methyl nonyl ketone, gamma-undecalactone, undecylene aldehyde, and mixtures thereof. These materials are preferably present at low levels, typically in amounts of less than about 30%, preferably less than about 20%, more preferably less than about 15%, by weight of the total fragrance compositions of the present invention.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -49-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

However, only small amounts are required to achieve an effect.

There are also hydrophilic components that have a significantly low detection limit and that are particularly useful in the composition of the present invention. Examples of these ingredients are allyl amyl glycolate, anethole, benzyl acetone, calon, cinnamyl alcohol, coumarin, cyclogalbanate, cyclal C, cymal, 4-decenal, dihydroisojasmonate, ethyl anthranilate, ethyl 2-methylbutyrate, ethyl methylphenylglycidate, ethyl vanillin, eugenol, floracetate, florhydral, fructone, fruten, heliotropin, keon, indole, isocyclocitral, isoeugenol, lyral, methyl heptyne carbonate, linalool, methyl anthranilate, methyl dihydrojasmonate, methyl isobutenyl tetrahydropyran, methyl beta-naphthyl ketone, beta-naphthol methyl ether, nerol, para-anisaldehyde, para-hydroxyphenylbutanone, phenylacetaldehyde, vanillin and mixtures thereof. The use of fragrance ingredients with a low odor detection limit minimizes the amount of organic material released into the atmosphere.

K. Dergens excipients used if applicable

Ingredients including detergent adjuvants such as detergent builders, buffers, preservatives and antimicrobials may also be present where appropriate.

i. Detergent Builder

Detergent builders that are effective for hard surface cleaners and have little tendency to form films or streaks at the critical levels are other optional ingredients. Preferred detergent builders are the carboxylic acid detergent builders discussed above in connection with the disclosed polycarboxylic acids, including citric acid and tartaric acid. Tartaric acid improves cleaning and minimizes the problem of filming and streaking that commonly occurs when detergent builders are added to hard surface cleaners.

The detergent builder is present in amounts that result in the detergent builder effect, with those that are not part of the acidic pH adjustment described above typically being present in amounts of

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 50 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

from about 0.01% to about 0.3%, more preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.2%, and most preferably from about 0.05% to about 0.1%.

ii. Buffer
5

The present compositions may also contain various other additives known for use in detergent compositions. Preferably, they are not used in amounts that result in objectionable films or streaks. Buffers are an important class of adjuvants in this application. This is often a result of the fact that the active ingredients are used in small amounts. An ideal buffer system will maintain the pH within the desired narrow range without causing problems of streaking or filming. Preferred buffers in the present invention are those that are highly volatile and yet provide cleaning effects when used. In this context, they are advantageous in that they can be used in higher amounts than corresponding buffers that are less volatile. Such buffers tend to have a low molecular weight, i.e., less than about 150 g/mol, and generally contain no more than one hydroxy group. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanolamine, ethanolamine, 2-amino-2-methyl-l-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol, acetic acid, glycolic acid, and the like. Most preferred of these compounds are ammonia, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol, and acetic acid. When used, these buffers are present in amounts of about 0.005% to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more preferred for the more volatile chemicals.

Non-volatile buffers may also be used in accordance with the invention. However, such buffers must generally be used in amounts less than the preferred amounts because they are more prone to streaking and filming. Examples of such buffers include, but are not limited to, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate and bicarbonate, 1,3-bis(aminomethyl)cyclohexane, sodium citrate, citric acid, maleic acid, tartaric acid, and the like. Maleic acid is particularly preferred as a buffer because of its tendency not to cause surface damage. Citric acid is also desirable because it has antimicrobial properties as an EPA-registered active ingredient. It has also been shown that azide

TER MEER STEINIVfkiSTER VpARTNER GbR - 51 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ity in compositions containing the hydrophilic polymers of the invention and used for daily shower applications, produces better wetting and longer lasting "drain" effects. When used, the non-volatile buffers are present in amounts of from about 0.001 % to about 0.05%, based on the weight of the composition.

In certain cases it may be advantageous to combine a volatile buffer with a non-volatile buffer to achieve the best pH control. As an example, the volatile buffer could be used to provide an appropriate initial pH while the non-volatile buffer can be used to provide residual alkalinity. However, the total content of non-volatile components in the formulation should be kept to a minimum.

iii. Preservatives and antibacterial agents

Preservatives may also be used and may be required in many compositions of the invention since they have high water contents. Examples of preservatives include Bronopol, Hexitidine, which are sold by Angus Chemical (211 Sanders Road, Northbrook, Illinois). Other preservatives include Kathon, 2-(hydroxymethyl)-(amino)-ethanol, propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethylaminoacetate, formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-triazinetrione and quaternary ammonium salts including dioctyldimethylammonium chloride, didecyldimethylammonium chloride, C12-, C14- and C18-dimethylbenzyl. Preferred preservatives include l,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one and polyhexamethylene biguanide, sold by Avicia Chemicals (Wilmington, Delaware 19897), and chlorhexidine diacetate, sold by Aldrich-Sigma (1001 West Sait Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233), sodium pyrithione, sold by Arch Chemicals (501 Merritt Seven, P.O. Box 5204, Norwalk CT 06856). If preservatives are used, they are preferably present at concentrations of about 0.0001% to about 0.01%. The same preservatives may also serve to provide an antibacterial effect on the surfaces, typically requiring the use of higher levels of about 0.005 to about 0.1%. Other antibacterial agents, including quaternary ammonium salts, may be present, but are in the

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -52-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The use of quaternary ammonium surfactants in compositions containing quaternary ammonium surfactants is not preferred in the context of the present invention at high levels, for example in amounts greater than about 0.05%. Such compounds have been found to frequently interfere with the beneficial effect of the preferred polymers. In particular, quaternary ammonium surfactants tend to hydrophobically modify hard surfaces. Thus, the preferred polymers have been found to be ineffective in compositions containing significant concentrations of quaternary ammonium surfactants. Similar results have been shown with the use of amphoteric surfactants, including lauryl betaines and cocoamamide betaines. If present, the level of cationic or amphoteric surfactants should be below about 0.1%, preferably below about 0.05%. More hydrophobic antibacterial/germicidal agents, such as orthobenzyl-para-chlorophenol, should be avoided. If present, these materials should be kept at levels of less than about 0.05%.

Non-limiting examples of other detergent adjuvants that may be used are enzymes such as proteases; hydrotropes such as sodium toluenesulfonate, sodium cumenesulfonate and potassium xylenesulfonate; thickeners other than the hydrophilic polymers in amounts of from about 0.01% to about 0.5%, preferably from about 0.01% to about 0.1%; corrosion inhibitors such as sodium metasilicate; and aesthetically enhancing ingredients such as dyes, provided that they do not cause adverse filming or streaking. Other suitable corrosion inhibitors are filed in pending U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 60/xxx,xxx.

as described by (P&G Case 7523P).

L. Other embodiments of cleaning compositions

In order to achieve visually acceptable cleaning results on traditional household surfaces such as ceramic tile, linoleum, vinyl flooring, wood and laminates (such as Pergo® manufactured by Formica), particularly when using the rinse-free surface cleaning methods described herein, the present preferred hard surface cleaning compositions contain relatively low levels of slow volatile materials and/or non-volatile materials, not including the optional fragrances described above.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -53-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Fabric materials. Compositions containing relatively high levels of slow volatile materials tend to leave visually unacceptable filming and/or streaking on the treated surface, particularly with non-rinse surface cleaning methods. As used herein, the term "slow volatile material" refers to a material that has a boiling point greater than about 16O ⁰ C and is not one of the fragrance materials described above. Preferably, the present compositions comprise no more than about 0.5% total, more preferably no more than about 0.425% total, and even more preferably no more than about 0.35% total, by weight of the composition, of slow volatile and non-volatile materials. Examples of non-volatile or slowly volatile materials, the amount of which is preferably limited in the present compositions, include, without limitation, non-volatile surfactants (such as alkyl ethoxylates), amine buffers having boiling points above 160 ^° C (such as 2-amino-l-butanol), organic solvents having boiling points greater than 160 ^° C (such as butoxypropanol), or mixtures thereof.

Other suitable hard surface cleaning compositions include those described in more detail in the pending U.S. patent applications of

R. Mastsers et al., Serial No. 60/045,858 (Case 6555P2), filed May 8, 1997; N. Policicchio et al., Serial No. 60/086,447 (Case 6873P2), filed May 22, 1998; K. Willman et al., Serial No. 60/085,837 (Case 7159P), filed May 18, 1998; K. Willman et al., Serial No. 60/110,356 (Case 7367P), filed December 1, 1998; which applications are hereby incorporated by reference.

M. Process for preparing hard surface cleaning compositions

The present hard surface cleaning compositions may be prepared by mixing all of the ingredients. It has been found that in order to achieve maximum dissolution of the fragrances in compositions in which active ingredients such as surfactants are present at low levels, a preferred order of addition is apparent. The preferred method comprises preparing a premix such as the fragrance compositions described above, which is then

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -54-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

is added to the "base" product. The premix comprises raw materials added in the following order: optional surfactant(s), if present, having an activity of 25% or more, then the fragrance, then the optional polymer, then the optional suds suppressor. In certain cases it is advantageous to add optional solvent(s) and/or optional buffer(s) to the premix after the optional suds suppressor. Thorough mixing of the premix gives the best results. The premix is then added to the base containing water and the other ingredients. The combined mixture (i.e. the premix in the base) is then mixed to form a homogeneous solution.

When an organic solvent such as ethanol is used in the solution, another preferred method is to first dissolve the fragrance in the organic solvent and then add this fragrance/solvent premix directly to the aqueous solution containing the surfactant and buffer.

Another preferred method for incorporating maximum fragrance into the present limited surfactant compositions is to prepare a premix in which the fragrance is added to a cyclodextrin mixture in aqueous media. Alternatively, the fragrance-cyclodextrin mixture can be preformed prior to the premix. This variation allows maximum fragrance incorporation into the composition and allows fragrance to be incorporated into compositions containing little or no surfactant.

In certain cases, a solution of the fragrance at relatively high levels cannot be achieved, even with the preferred manufacturing methods. However, for counter and floor cleaner applications, although not intended to be limited, the entire heterogeneous composition can be incorporated directly into the application product. Examples where this application method is desirable include pre-moistened wipes and dry absorbent substrates used in conjunction with the solution.

In cases where the surfactant content does not limit the solubility of the fragrance in the compositions, a classified

TER MEER STEINltfeiS'TER &"PARTNER GbR -55-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

For example, a suitable order of addition is to first introduce water, then any optional detergent surfactant and/or organic acid, followed by any optional hydrophobic cleaning solvents. After the solvent is added, the pH is adjusted to an optimum in the manner desired by the manufacturer. The optional polymer may then be added, followed by any optional peroxide, fragrance and/or dye.
10

III. Cleaning pads and/or cloths

According to a further embodiment, the present invention relates to a preferably disposable cleaning pad for cleaning hard surfaces, which cleaning pad comprises:

(a) at least one absorption layer;

(b) optionally a liquid permeable scrubbing layer; the liquid permeable scrubbing layer preferably comprising an apertured shaped sheet (or film), more preferably a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional plastic fabric having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures and/or surface irregularities and preferably comprising a hydrophobic material;

(c) optionally an attachment layer, the attachment layer preferably comprising a clear or translucent material, more preferably a clear or translucent polyethylene film, the attachment layer preferably comprising a loop and/or hook material for attachment to a support head of a handle of a cleaning device;

(d) where appropriate, multiple planar surfaces;

(e) optionally at least one functional cuff, preferably at least one freely movable, looped functional cuff;

(f) optionally a density gradient through at least one absorption layer; wherein the density gradient preferably comprises a first absorption layer having a density of about 0.01 g/cm ³ to about 0.15 g/cm ³ ,

TER MEER STEINMI'ISTErVpARTNER GbR -56-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

preferably about 0.03 g/cm ³ to about 0.1 g/cm ³ , and more preferably about 0.04 g/cm ³ to about 0.06 g/cm ³ , and a second absorbent layer having a density of about 0.04 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.1 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ , and more preferably about 0.12 g/cm ³ to about 0.17 g/cm ³ ; wherein the density of the first absorbent layer is about 0.04 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.07 g/cm ³ and more preferably about 0.1 g/cm ³ less than the density of the second absorbent layer;

(g) optionally at least one adhesive scrubbing strip, preferably comprising a material selected from the group consisting of nylon, polyester, polypropylene, abrasive material and mixtures thereof; and

(h) optionally a fragrance carrier complex, preferably selected from the group comprising cyclodextrin inclusion complexes, matrix fragrance microcapsules and mixtures thereof, wherein the fragrance carrier complex is preferably arranged in an absorption layer.

Preferably, the cleaning pad comprises at least two absorbent layers, wherein the absorbent layers have different widths in the Z direction. Preferably, the cleaning pad has a ti2oo absorbent capacity of at least about 5 g/g.

According to a further embodiment, the present invention relates to a preferably disposable cleaning cloth for cleaning hard surfaces, which cleaning cloth has functional cuffs, preferably freely movable, double-layered, loop-shaped functional cuffs.

In developing the present cleaning pads and cloths, Applicant has surprisingly found that a significant aspect of cleaning performance is associated with the ability to provide a cleaning pad comprising apertured formed films, a liquid-impermeable attachment layer and/or density gradients and/or functional cuffs and a cleaning cloth having functional cuffs. In the context of a typical cleaning operation (i.e., when the cleaning pad and/or cloth is moved in a direction substantially parallel to the Y dimension or width of the pad or cloth,

TER MEER STEINIGSTER" & PARTNER GbR -57-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Each of these structural elements provides enhanced cleaning performance to the cleaning pads and/or cloths, both separately and in combination with one or more additional elements. The apertured formed films preferably used in the scrubbing layer are permeable to liquids and allow efficient transfer of liquid from the surface to be cleaned to other layers of the cleaning pad, preferably to one or more absorbent layers, while reducing the tendency of that liquid to be re-squeezed onto the surface to be cleaned. Functional cuffs are preferably freely movable so that they can "flip" forward and backward in the Y direction during a typical cleaning operation, thereby capturing particulate material and reducing the tendency of that particulate material to redeposit on the surface to be cleaned. Preferably, density gradients are incorporated into the absorbent layer(s) of the cleaning pad to "pump" or "wick" the liquid away from the surface to be cleaned and to areas of the cleaning pad furthest from the surface to be cleaned. The liquid impermeable attachment layer provides a barrier layer which serves to better distribute the liquid in the X-Y direction after it reaches the back of the pad furthest from the surface to be cleaned. These objects of the present invention and the advantages achieved thereby will be explained in more detail with reference to the drawings.

Those skilled in the art will recognize that a variety of materials may be used to practice the claimed invention. Thus, it is to be understood that while preferred materials for the various components of the cleaning implement, pad and cloth are described below, the invention is not limited to this description.

A. Absorption layer

The absorbent layer serves to retain any liquids and dirt absorbed by the cleaning pad during use. Although the scrubbing layer has some influence on the pad's ability to absorb liquids,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -58-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ities or fluids, the absorbent layer plays the primary role in achieving the desired total absorbency. Furthermore, the absorbent layer preferably comprises a plurality of layers designed to provide the cleaning pad with a plurality of planar surfaces and/or density gradients.

From a fluid absorption standpoint, the absorbent layer is capable of removing liquid or fluids and soil from the scrubbing layer such that the scrubbing layer maintains the ability to continuously remove soil from the surface. The absorbent layer should also be capable of retaining absorbed material under typical application pressures to avoid "squeezing out" of the absorbed soil, cleaning solution, etc.

The absorbent layer comprises any material capable of absorbing and retaining fluids or liquids during use. To achieve the desired total fluid capacities, it is preferred to incorporate a relatively high capacity material (in grams of fluid per gram of absorbent material) into the absorbent layer. As used herein, the term "superabsorbent material" means any absorbent material having a g/g capacity (gram/gram capacity) for water of at least about 15 g/g, as determined under a confining pressure of 0.02 bar (0.3 psi). Since the majority of cleaning fluids useful in the present invention are water-based, it is preferred that the superabsorbent materials have a relatively high g/g capacity for water or water-based fluids.

Representative examples of superabsorbent materials include water-insoluble, water-swellable superabsorbent gel-forming polymers (also referred to herein as "superabsorbent gel-forming polymers"), which are well known in the literature. These materials exhibit very high absorption capacities for water. The superabsorbent gel-forming polymers useful in the present invention can have sizes, shapes and/or morphologies that vary within a wide range. These polymers can be in the form of particles having a high ratio of largest dimension to smallest dimension (e.g., granules, flakes, powders, particle aggregates, cross-linked particle aggregates, and the like) or they can be in the form of fibers, sheets, films, sheets, foams, laminates, and the like. The use of superabsorbent polymers in the present invention is preferred.

TER MEER STEINIGSTER & PARTNER GbR -59-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

perabsorbent gel-forming polymers in fibrous form provide the advantage of improved retention during the cleaning process compared to particles. Although their capacity for water-based mixtures is generally lower than for water, these materials still demonstrate significant absorbent capacity for such mixtures. The patent literature is replete with publications of water-swellable materials. For example, see U.S. Patent 3,699,103 (Harper et al.), issued June 13, 1972; U.S. Patent 3,770,731 (Harmon), issued June 20, 1972; U.S. Reissue Patent 32,649 (Brandt et al.), reissued June 19, 1972.

April 1989; U.S. Patent 4,834,735 (Alemany et al.), issued May 30, 1989.

Superabsorbent gel-forming polymers useful in the present invention include a variety of water-insoluble but water-swellable polymers capable of absorbing large quantities of fluids or liquids. Such polymeric materials are also commonly referred to as "hydrocolloids" and can include polysaccharides such as carboxymethyl starch, carboxymethyl cellulose and hydroxypropyl cellulose; nonionic types such as polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinyl ether; cationic types such as polyvinylpyridine, polyvinylmorpholinone and ν,ν-dimethylaminoethyl or N,N-diethylaminopropyl acrylates and methacrylates and the corresponding quaternary salts thereof. Typically, the superabsorbent gel-forming polymers useful in the present invention possess a variety of anionic functional groups such as sulfonic acid and more typically carboxy groups. Examples of polymers useful herein are those prepared from polymerizable, unsaturated, acidic monomers.

Accordingly, such monomers include the olefinically unsaturated acids and anhydrides having at least one olefinic carbon-carbon double bond. More specifically, these monomers can be selected from olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acids and acid anhydrides, olefinically unsaturated sulfonic acids, and mixtures thereof.

Some non-acidic monomers may also be added, usually in minor amounts, in the preparation of the superabsorbent gel-forming polymers useful in the present invention. Such non-acidic monomers include, for example, the water-soluble or water-dispersible esters of acidic monomers as well as monomers that do not contain any carboxylic or sulfonic acid groups at all. Non-acidic monomers that may optionally be used thus include monomers that have the following

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 60 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Types of functional groups include: carboxylic or sulfonic ester groups, hydroxyl groups, amide groups, amino groups, nitrile groups, quaternary ammonium salt groups, aryl groups (e.g., phenyl groups such as those derived from monomeric styrene). These non-acidic monomers are well known materials and are described in more detail in, for example, U.S. Patent 4,076,663 (Masuda et al.), issued February 28, 1978 and U.S. Patent 4,062,817 (Westerman), issued December 13, 1977, which patents are hereby incorporated by reference.

Olefinically unsaturated carboxylic acid and carboxylic acid anhydride monomers include the acrylic acids defined by acrylic acid per se, methacrylic acid, ethacrylic acid, cx-chloroacrylic acid, α-cyanoacrylic acid, β-methylacrylic acid (crotonic acid), α-phenylacrylic acid, β-acryloxypropionic acid, sorbic acid, α-chlorosorbic acid, angelic acid, cinnamic acid, p-chlorocinnamic acid, β-sterylacrylic acid, itaconic acid, citroconic acid, mesaconic acid, glutaconic acid, aconitic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, tricarboxyethylene and maleic anhydride.

Olefinically unsaturated sulfonic acid monomers include aliphatic or aromatic vinylsulfonic acids such as vinylsulfonic acid, allylsulfonic acid, vinyltoluenesulfonic acid and styrenesulfonic acid; acrylic and methacrylic sulfonic acids such as sulfoethyl acrylate, sulfoethyl methacrylate, sulfopropyl acrylate, sulfopropyl methacrylate, 2-hydroxy-3-methacryloxypropylsulfonic acid and 2-acrylamide-2-methylpropanesulfonic acid.

Preferred superabsorbent gelling polymers to be used in the present invention contain carboxy groups. These polymers include hydrolyzed starch/acrylonitrile graft copolymers, partially neutralized hydrolyzed starch/acrylonitrile graft copolymers, starch/acrylic acid graft copolymers, partially neutralized starch/acrylic acid graft copolymers, saponified vinyl acetate/acrylic ester copolymers, hydrolyzed acrylonitrile or acrylamide copolymers, slightly crosslinked polymers of the above copolymers, partially neutralized polyacrylic acid and slightly crosslinked polymers of partially neutralized polyacrylic acid. These polymers can be used either alone or in the form of a mixture of two or more different polymers. Examples of these polymer materials are described in U.S. Patent 3,661,875, U.S. Patent 4,076,663, U.S. Patent 4,093,776, U.S. Patent 4,666,893, and U.S. Patent 4,734,478.

The most preferred polymer materials for the production of superabsorbent

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 61 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM January 21, 2003

sorbent gel-forming polymers are lightly cross-linked polymers of partially neutralized polyacrylic acids and starch derivatives thereof. Most preferably, the hydrogel-forming absorbent polymers comprise from about 50% to about 95%, preferably about 75%, neutralized, lightly cross-linked polyacrylic acid (i.e., poly(sodium acrylate/acrylic acid)). Cross-linking renders the polymer substantially water-insoluble and partially determines the absorbent capacity and extractable polymer content properties of the superabsorbent gel-forming polymers. Methods for cross-linking these polymers and typical cross-linking agents are described in more detail in U.S. Patent 4,076,663.

Although the superabsorbent gel-forming polymers are preferably of one type (i.e., homogeneous), blends of polymers may also be used in embodiments of the present invention. For example, blends of starch/acrylic acid graft copolymers and lightly crosslinked polymers of partially neutralized polyacrylic acid may be used in the present invention.

While any of the superabsorbent gelling polymers described in the prior art may be useful in the present invention, it has recently been found that when significant amounts (i.e., greater than about 50% by weight of the absorbent structure) of superabsorbent gelling polymers are to be incorporated into an absorbent structure, and particularly when one or more regions of the absorbent layer comprise more than 50% by weight of the region, the problem of gel blocking of the swollen particles can impair fluid flow and thus adversely affect the ability of the gelling polymers to absorb to their full capacity within the desired time period. U.S. Patent 5,147,343 (Kellenberger et al.), issued September 15, 1992, and U.S. Patent 5,149,335 (Kellenberger et al.), issued September 22, 1992, describe superabsorbent gel-forming polymers in terms of their Absorbency Under Load (AUL), in which gel-forming polymers absorb fluid (0.9% saline) under a compression pressure of 0.02 bar (0.3 psi). (The disclosure of each of these patents is incorporated herein by reference.) The methods for determining AUL are described in these patents. The polymers described therein may be particularly useful in embodiments of the invention which involve regions of relatively high density.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -62-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

contain superabsorbent gel-forming polymers. Particularly when high concentrations of the superabsorbent gel-forming polymer are incorporated into the cleaning pad, these polymers preferably have an AUL, as measured according to the methods described in U.S. Patent 5,147,343, of at least about 24 ml/g, more preferably at least about 27 ml/g after 1 hour; or an AUL, as measured according to the methods described in U.S. Patent 5,149,335, of at least about 15 ml/g, more preferably at least about 18 ml/g after 15 minutes.

U.S. Patent 5,599,335 (Goldman et al.), issued February 11, 1997, and U.S. Patent 5,562,646 (Goldman et al.), issued October 8, 1996 (which patents are incorporated herein by reference) also address the problem of gel blocking and describe superabsorbent gel-forming polymers capable of overcoming this phenomenon. In particular, these applications disclose superabsorbent gel-forming polymers which avoid gel blocking even at higher pressures, particularly 0.05 bar (0.7 psi). In embodiments of the present invention wherein the absorbent layer includes regions containing high levels (e.g., greater than about 50% by weight of the region) of superabsorbent gel-forming polymer, it may be preferred that the superabsorbent gel-forming polymer be one of those described in the above-referenced Goldman et al. patents.

Other superabsorbent materials useful herein include hydrophilic polymeric foams such as those described in commonly assigned U.S. Patent Nos. 5,650,222 (DesMarais et al.), issued July 22, 1997; U.S. Patent No. 5,387,207 (Dyer et al.), issued February 7, 1995; U.S. Patent No. 5,563,179 (DesMarais et al.), issued October 8, 1996; U.S. Patent 5,550,167 (DesMarais), issued August 27, 1996; and U.S. Patent 5,260,345 (DesMarais et al.), issued November 9, 1993, which patents are hereby incorporated by reference. These references disclose polymeric hydrophilic absorbent foams obtained by polymerizing a high internal phase water-in-oil emulsion (commonly referred to as HIPEs). These foams can be readily tailored to provide varying physical properties that affect fluid handling capability (pore size, capillary suction, density, etc.). As such, these materials are particularly useful either alone or in combination with other foams of this type or with fiber structures for

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -63-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Achieving the total capacity required according to the invention.

When superabsorbent material is incorporated into the absorbent layer, the absorbent layer preferably comprises at least about 15%, preferably at least about 20%, and more preferably at least about 25% of the superabsorbent material by weight of the absorbent layer.

The absorbent layer may also consist of or contain fibrous material. Fibers suitable for use in the invention include those that occur naturally (modified or unmodified) as well as synthetically produced fibers. Examples of suitable unmodified/modified naturally occurring fibers include cotton, esparto grass, bagasse, kemp, flax, silk, wool, wood pulp, chemically modified wood pulp, jute, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate. Suitable synthetic fibers may be made from polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl fluoride, polytetrafluoroethylene, polyvinylidene chloride, polyacrylic materials such as ORLON®, polyvinyl acetate, Rayon®, polyethylvinyl acetate, insoluble or soluble polyvinyl alcohol, polyolefins such as polyethylene (e.g. PULPEX®) and polypropylene, polyamides such as nylon, polyesters such as DACRON® or KODEL®, polyurethanes, polystyrenes or the like. The absorbent layer may comprise exclusively naturally occurring fibers, exclusively synthetic fibers, or any compatible combination of naturally occurring and synthetic fibers.

The fibers useful herein may be hydrophilic, hydrophobic, or a combination of both hydrophilic and hydrophobic fibers. As indicated above, the particular selection of hydrophilic or hydrophobic fibers depends on the other materials present in the absorbent layer (and to some extent also in the scrubbing layer). This means that the type of fibers is such that the cleaning pad has the necessary fluid retardation and overall fluid absorbency. Hydrophilic fibers suitable for use in the invention include cellulosic fibers, modified cellulosic fibers, rayon, polyester fibers, and hydrophilic nylon (HYDROFIL®). Suitable hydrophilic fibers may also be obtained by hydrophilizing hydrophobic fibers, such as with surfactant- or silica-treated thermoplastic fibers derived, for example, from polyolefins such as polyethylene or polypropylene, polyacrylic fibers, polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes, and the like.

·

·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -64-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Suitable wood pulp fibers can be obtained by the well-known chemical processes such as the kraft process and the sulphite process. It is particularly preferred to produce these wood pulp fibers from southern softwoods because of their excellent absorption properties. These wood pulp fibers can also be produced by mechanical processes such as from ground wood, mechanically refined wood pulp processes, thermo-mechanical, chemical-mechanical and chemical-thermomechanical wood pulp processes. Recycled or waste wood pulp fibers as well as bleached and unbleached wood pulp fibers can also be used.

Another type of hydrophilic fibers useful in the present invention are chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers. The term "chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers" refers to cellulosic fibers that have been stiffened by chemical means to increase the stiffness of the fibers under both dry and aqueous conditions. Such means include the addition of a chemical stiffening agent, for example, coating and/or impregnating the fibers. Such means may also include stiffening the fibers by changing the chemical structure, for example, by cross-linking the polymer chains.

When fibers are used as the absorbent layer (or as an integral part thereof), the fibers may optionally be combined with a thermoplastic material. When melted, at least a portion of this thermoplastic material migrates to the intersections of the fibers, particularly as a result of capillary gradients present between the fibers. These intersections then become bonding sites for the thermoplastic material. After cooling, the thermoplastic materials solidify at these interfaces to form the bonding sites which hold together the matrix or web of fibers in each of the layers in question. This may be beneficial in further increasing the overall cohesion of the cleaning pad.

Among the various effects, bonding at the fiber intersection points increases the overall compressive modulus and strength of the resulting thermally bonded material. In the case of chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers, melting and migration of the thermoplastic material has the further effect of increasing the overall pore size of the resulting fabric while maintaining density and basis weight.

• · • ·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -65-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

of the originally formed web. This can improve the fluid uptake properties of the thermally bonded web upon initial exposure to the fluid as a result of improved fluid permeability and upon subsequent contact as a result of the combined ability of the stiffened fiber to maintain its stiffness upon wetting and the ability of the thermoplastic material at the fiber intersections to remain bonded upon wetting and under pressure under moisture. As a result, the thermally bonded webs of stiffened fibers retain their original overall volume while the volume regions previously occupied by the thermoplastic material open up, thus increasing the average interfiber capillary pore size.

The thermoplastic materials useful in the present invention may be in any of a variety of forms, such as particles, fibers, or combinations of particles and fibers. Thermoplastic fibers are particularly preferred because of their ability to form a variety of interfiber bonding sites. Suitable thermoplastic materials may be formed from any thermoplastic polymers that can be melted at temperatures that do not unduly damage the fibers that make up the primary web or matrix of each layer. Preferably, the melting point of the thermoplastic material is less than about 190°C, and preferably between about 75°C and about 175°C. In any event, the melting point of this thermoplastic material should be no lower than the temperature at which the thermally bonded absorbent structures, when used in the cleaning pads, are likely to be stored. The melting point of the thermoplastic material is therefore typically no lower than about 50 ^° C.

The thermoplastic materials, particularly the thermoplastic fibers, can be made from a variety of thermoplastic polymers including polyolefins such as polyethylene (e.g. PULPEX®) and polypropylene, polyesters, copolyesters, polyvinyl acetate, polyethylvinyl acetate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polyacrylic resins, polyamides, copolyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and copolymers of any of the above, such as vinyl chloride/vinyl acetate, and the like. Depending on the desired properties of the thermally bonded absorbent material formed, suitable thermoplastic materials include

TER MEER STEINM ^# EisTER ä'pARTNER GbR -66-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

hydrophobic fibers which have been rendered hydrophilic, such as surfactant- or silica-treated thermoplastic fibers derived, for example, from polyolefins such as polyethylene or polypropylene, polyacrylic resins, polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes, and the like. The surface of the hydrophobic thermoplastic fiber can be rendered hydrophilic by treating it with a surfactant, such as a nonionic or anionic surfactant, for example by spraying the fiber with a surfactant, by dipping the fiber in a surfactant, or by incorporating the surfactant as part of the polymer melt used to make the thermoplastic fiber. Upon melting and resolidification, the surfactant tends to remain on the surface of the thermoplastic fiber. Suitable surfactants include nonionic surfactants such as Brij® 76 manufactured by ICI Americas, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware, and various surfactants sold under the trademark Pegosperse® by Glyco Chemical, Inc., Greenwich, Connecticut. In addition to nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants may also be used. These surfactants may be applied to the thermoplastic fibers in amounts of, for example, about 0.2 to about 1 g/cm ² of the thermoplastic fiber.

Suitable thermoplastic fibers can be made from a single polymer (monocomponent fibers) or from more than one polymer (e.g. bicomponent fibers). The term "bicomponent fibers" refers to thermoplastic fibers that have a core fiber of one polymer encased in a thermoplastic sheath of a different polymer. The polymer forming the sheath often melts at a different, typically lower, temperature than the polymer forming the core. As a result, these bicomponent fibers allow for thermal bonding as a result of melting of the sheath polymer while maintaining the desired strength properties of the core polymer.

Bicomponent fibers suitable for the invention include sheath/core fibers with the following polymer combinations: polyethylene/polypropylene, polyethylvinylacetate/polypropylene, polyethylene/polyester, polypropylene/polyester, copolyester/polyester and the like. Thermoplastic bicomponent fibers particularly suitable for the invention are those with a

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -67-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 21.01.2003

core of polypropylene or polyester and a sheath of a lower melting copolyester such as polyethylvinyl acetate or polyethylene (such as those available from Danaklon a/s and Chisso Corp.). These bicomponent fibers may be concentric or eccentric. The terms "concentric" and "eccentric" refer to whether the sheath has a uniform or non-uniform thickness across the cross-section of the bicomponent fibers. Eccentric bicomponent fibers may be better suited to provide higher compressive strength at lower fiber thicknesses. Preferred bicomponent fibers include a copolyolefin bicomponent fiber having less than about 81% polyethylene terephthalate as the core and less than about 51% of a copolyolefin as the sheath. One such preferred bicomponent fiber is commercially available from Hoechst Celanese Corporation of New Jersey under the trademark CELBOND® T-255. As discussed below, the amount of bicomponent fibers preferably varies depending on the density of the material in which they are to be used.

Methods for making thermally bonded fiber materials are described in U.S. Patent No. 5,607,414 (Richards et al.), issued March 4, 1997; and U.S. Patent No. 5,549,589 (Horney et al.), issued August 27, 1996 (see particularly columns 9 and 10). The disclosures of both of these documents are incorporated herein by reference.

The absorbent layer may also be a HIPE-derived hydrophilic polymeric foam which does not have the high absorbency of those materials described above as "superabsorbent materials." Such foams and methods for making them are described in U.S. Patent 5,550,167 (DesMarais), issued August 27, 1996; and U.S. Patent No. 5,563,179 (Stone et al.), issued October 8, 1996 (both of which references are incorporated herein by reference).

The absorbent layer of the cleaning pad may be constructed of a homogeneous material, such as a mixture of cellulose fibers (which may be thermally bonded) and a swellable superabsorbent gel-forming polymer. Alternatively, the absorbent layer may be constructed of discrete layers of material, such as a layer of thermally bonded airlaid material and a discrete layer of a superabsorbent material. For example, the thermally bonded cellulose fiber layer may be positioned deeper (e.g., below) the superabsorbent material.

TER MEER STEINM'EISTER &"PARTN*ER GbR -68-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

than (i.e. between the superabsorbent material and the scrubbing layer). In order to achieve high absorption capacity and retention of fluid under pressure while providing an initial delay in fluid uptake, it may be preferable to use such discrete layers to form the absorbent layer. In this regard, the superabsorbent material may be located away from the scrubbing layer by inserting a less absorbent layer as the lowermost region of the absorbent layer. For example, a layer of cellulose fibers may be located lower (i.e. below) than the superabsorbent material (i.e. between the superabsorbent material and the scrubbing layer).

According to a preferred embodiment, the absorbent layer comprises a thermally bonded airlaid web of cellulosic fibers (Flint River, available from Weyerhaeuser, WA) and AL Thermal C (thermoplastic material available from Danaklon a/s, Varde, Denmark) and a swellable, hydrogel-forming superabsorbent polymer. The superabsorbent polymer is preferably incorporated such that a discrete layer is present near the surface of the absorbent layer remote from the scrubbing layer. Preferably, a thin layer of, for example, cellulosic fibers (optionally thermally bonded) is disposed above the superabsorbent gel-forming polymer to improve containment.

B. Liquid-permeable scrubbing layer used, if applicable

The scrubbing layer is the part of the cleaning pad that is in contact with the soiled surface during cleaning. Accordingly, the materials suitable for use as the scrubbing layer must be sufficiently durable so that the layer maintains its integrity during the cleaning process. Furthermore, when the cleaning pad is used in combination with a solution, the scrubbing layer must be at least partially liquid permeable to be able to transfer liquids and soil to the absorbent layer. When the device is used with a cleaning solution (i.e. in a wet state) or without a cleaning solution (i.e. in a dry state), the scrubbing layer facilitates other functions in addition to the removal of particulate material, such as

TER MEER STEINm'eISTER ^PARTNER GbR -69-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Polishing, dusting and shining the surface being cleaned.

The scrubbing layer may be a single layer or multi-layer structure, where one or more of these layers may be slotted to facilitate scrubbing of the soiled surface and capture of the particulate material. This scrubbing layer, when passed over the soiled surface, interacts with the soil (and cleaning solution, if one is used), loosening and emulsifying tough soil and allowing it to be freely transferred to the absorbent layer of the pad. The scrubbing layer preferably contains openings (e.g., slots, tapered capillaries or orifices) which provide easy passage for larger particulate materials to freely penetrate and then become trapped in the absorbent layer of the pad. Low density structures are preferred for use as the scrubbing layer to further facilitate transport of the particulate material to the absorbent layer of the pad.

Materials particularly well suited to achieving the desired integrity of the scrub layer include a wide variety of materials such as woven and nonwoven materials; polymeric materials such as apertured thermoplastic films or sheets, apertured plastic films and water-molded thermoplastic sheets; porous foams; cross-linked foams; cross-linked thermoplastic sheets or films; and thermoplastic reinforcing fabrics. Suitable woven and nonwoven materials may include natural fibers (e.g., wood fibers or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers such as polyolefins (e.g., polyethylene and polypropylene), polyesters, polyamides and synthetic cellulosics (e.g., RAYON®), or a combination of natural and synthetic fibers. Such synthetic fibers may be made using known processes and may be, for example, carded, melt spun, melt blown, air laid, needle punched and the like. According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the cleaning pad comprises a liquid permeable scrubbing layer comprising at least partially an apertured formed film. Apertured formed films are preferred for the liquid permeable scrubbing layer because they are permeable to aqueous cleaning liquids containing soil, including dissolved and undissolved particulate materials, yet are non-absorbent and reduce

* &iacgr; 'J »It ···!

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 7o-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

have a low tendency to allow liquids to flow back and re-wet the surface to be cleaned. In this way, the surface of the shaped sheet in contact with the surface to be cleaned remains dry, thus reducing the formation of films and streaks on the surface to be cleaned and enabling the surface to be wiped substantially dry. The Applicant has surprisingly found that apertured shaped sheets or films having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures, meaning that the diameter at the bottom of the aperture is larger than the diameter at the top of the aperture, do in fact exert a suction effect when the cleaning pad is moved over the surface to be cleaned. This assists in the movement of liquid from the surface to be cleaned to other layers of the cleaning pad, such as the absorption layer(s). In addition, tapered or funnel-shaped apertures exhibit an even greater tendency to prevent liquids from flowing back through the scrubbing layer to the surface to be cleaned after the liquid has been transferred to other layers such as the absorbent layer(s). Apertured formed sheets having tapered or funnel-shaped apertures are thus preferred. Suitable apertured formed sheets or films are described in U.S. Patent No. 3,929,135, "Absorptive Structures Having Tapered Capillaries," issued Dec. 30, 1975 to Thompson; U.S. Patent 4,324,246, "Disposable Absorbent Article Having a Stain Resistant Topsheet," issued Apr. 13, 1982 to Mullane et al.; U.S. Patent 4,342,314, "Resilient Plastic Web Exhibiting Fiber-Like Properties," issued Aug. 3, 1982 to Radel et al.; U.S. Patent 4,463,045, "Macroscopically Expanded Three-Dimensional Plastic Web Exhibiting Non-Glossy Visible Surface and Cloth-Like Tactile Impression," issued July 31, 1984 to Ahr et al.; and U.S. Patent 5,006,394, "Multilayer Polymeric Film," issued Apr. 9, 1991 to Baird. Each of these patents is incorporated herein by reference. The preferred liquid permeable scrub layer of the present invention is the apertured formed film described in one or more of the above patents and sold on sanitary napkins by The Procter & Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio as DRI-WEAVE®.

Although a hydrophilic, apertured, formed film as

•t ·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 71 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

When the liquid-permeable scrubbing layer of a cleaning pad is to be used in the cleaning of hard surfaces, hydrophobic, apertured, formed films are preferred because they have a lower tendency to allow liquids to flow back through the scrubbing layer and onto the surface to be cleaned. This results in improved cleaning performance in terms of filming and streaking, less soil residue and a shorter drying time of the surface to be cleaned, which properties are very important aspects of cleaning hard surfaces. The liquid-permeable scrubbing layer of the present cleaning pad is therefore preferably at least partially a hydrophobic, apertured, formed film. It should be noted, however, that the scrubbing layer can be constructed from more than one type of material.

In a preferred embodiment, the liquid-permeable scrubbing layer is a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional plastic nonwoven fabric, preferably having projections or surface irregularities on the lower surface of the scrubbing layer which is in contact with the surface to be cleaned. Surface irregularities can also be created in such a nonwoven fabric using well-known photoetching techniques. A detailed description of such a nonwoven fabric and a method of making it is disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,463,045, issued July 31, 1984 to Ahr et al. and assigned to The Procter & Gamble Company, which patent is hereby incorporated by reference. Ahr et al. describe a macroscopically expanded, three-dimensional nonwoven fabric having surface irregularities which is used as a topsheet for diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence pads, and the like. Ahr et al. prefer a fleece with surface irregularities because they give the fleece a non-glossy appearance and improve the feel of the fleece by giving the wearer of the diaper, sanitary napkin, etc. a more fabric or cloth-like feel. However, in the context of cleaning hard surfaces, the appearance and feel of a cleaning pad are less important. The applicant has found that a liquid-permeable scrubbing layer with a macroscopically expanded, three-dimensional fleece with surface irregularities leads to improved performance of the scrubbing layer. The surface irregularities cause a more abrasive surface,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -72-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

which is associated with better cleaning performance. The surface irregularities in combination with tapered or funnel-shaped openings result in improved cleaning, absorbency and rewetting properties of the cleaning pad. Accordingly, the liquid-permeable scrubbing layer preferably comprises an apertured molded film comprising a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional plastic nonwoven having tapered or funnel-shaped openings and/or surface irregularities. A three-dimensional scrubbing layer is particularly preferred for improving the ability of the cleaning pad to pick up particulate material.

Figure 4a shows a cleaning pad 400 having a liquid permeable scrub layer 415 comprising an apertured molded film having apertures 421 which are preferably tapered or funnel-shaped. The apertured molded film may comprise the entire scrub layer or may be used in combination with other materials in accordance with the present invention.

The scrub layer may further comprise, on at least a portion of the lower surface of the pad, a material which imparts significant texture to the pad. Preferably, preferred means for providing such texture is a multi-layer composite structure comprising a reinforcing material (e.g. polypropylene) and a spun-laid material (e.g. polyester). The composite structure is heat pressed to partially melt the reinforcing material, resulting in bonding of the discrete layers. The heat treatment further causes the reinforcing material to shrink, thus producing a multi-layer composite structure having wrinkles or folds.

As will be explained in more detail below, the cleaning pad may have a separate layer that serves as an attachment layer for connection to the cleaning device. However, in certain embodiments, the cleaning pad may be designed such that the scrubbing layer also serves to attach the pad to the device. For example, the scrubbing layer may be larger in both length and width so that it can be attached directly to the device. This may eliminate the need for a separate attachment layer.

·

·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -73-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

C. Fixing layer used, if applicable

The cleaning pads and/or cloths of the invention optionally, but preferably, have an attachment layer by which the pad and/or cloth can be connected to the handle of the device or to the support head of preferred devices. The attachment layer may be necessary in those embodiments where the absorbent layer is not suitable for attaching the pad to the support head of the handle. The attachment layer may also serve as a means to prevent the fluid from flowing over the upper surface (the surface in contact with the handle) of the cleaning pad and may further result in improved integrity of the pad. Like the scrubbing and absorbent layers, the attachment layer may be of a single layer structure or a multi-layer structure provided that it meets the requirements set out above.

According to a preferred embodiment of the invention, the fastening layer comprises a surface capable of being mechanically fastened to the support head of the stem via a known hook and loop technique. In such an embodiment, the fastening layer comprises at least one surface capable of being mechanically fastened to hooks attached to the lower surface of the support head of the stem.

Preferably, the attachment layer comprises a clear or translucent material, particularly in cleaning pads having an abrasive layer and a density gradient where the abrasive layer comprises an apertured, formed film. A cleaning pad having an abrasive layer comprising an apertured, formed film and a density gradient effectively directs soil away from the surface to be cleaned to areas of the cleaning pad further away from the surface to be cleaned. As a result, the lower layers of the cleaning pad actually appear relatively clean, so that users may not believe that the cleaning pad needs to be replaced or discarded, or consumers may assume that the cleaning pad is not working properly. The attachment layer preferably comprises a clear or translucent film, for example of polyethylene, polypropylene, polyester or similar films,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -74-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

more preferably a polyethylene film to provide visualization of the soil absorbed in the absorbent layer(s), particularly in the top absorbent layer. When the user observes the amount of soil present in the absorbent layer, he is signaled to discard the cleaning pad or, in the context of a cleaning device, to remove the current soiled cleaning pad from the handle and discard it and attach a new cleaning pad to the handle. A clear or translucent polyethylene film is also preferred because it is typically impermeable to the liquid and thus reduces the possibility of liquid bleeding through the attachment layer and thus improves the lateral distribution (in the X-Y plane) of the liquid through the top absorbent layer while keeping the head of the cleaning device clean and dry.

Since a clear or translucent polyethylene film is not normally compatible with conventional hook-loop technology, it is preferred to attach a loop and/or hook material to the clear or translucent polyethylene film. The loop and/or hook material can be attached to the clear or translucent polyethylene film in a variety of ways, such as in the form of narrow strips or other patterns. The loop and/or hook material should be applied to the polyethylene sheet in such a way that observation of the soil in the absorbent layer is possible through the clear polyethylene sheet. Alternatively or in addition to the loop or hook material, the attachment layer can comprise a preferably double-sided adhesive strip (e.g. 1524 Transfer Adhesive Two-Sided Tape available from 3M Corp.) or a high-tack adhesive (e.g. HL1620BZP available from Fuller Co.) having sufficient wet strength for attaching the cleaning pad to a handle. The fastening layer may further comprise a hook or loop material laminated to a clear or translucent backing material (for example, XML-1657 available from 3M Corp.).

As another way to achieve the desired fluid impermeability and attachment capability, a laminated structure can be used, for example a structure made of a meltblown film and a nonwoven fabric. According to another embodiment of the present invention, the attachment layer comprises a three-layer material

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -75-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

with a layer of meltblown polypropylene film sandwiched between two layers of spunbonded polypropylene.

In an alternative embodiment, the attachment layer may have a Y dimension (width) that is greater than the Y dimension of the other elements of the cleaning pad so that the attachment layer can engage attachment structures disposed on a mop head of a handle of a cleaning implement as described below in Section V.A. and shown in Figure 8. In this manner, the cleaning pad can be securely attached to a mop head for cleaning hard surfaces.

D. Multiple planar surfaces used, if applicable

Although the ability of the cleaning pad to absorb and retain fluids is important to the effectiveness of cleaning the hard surface (see pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/756,507 (Holt et al.), pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/756,846 (Sherry et al.), and pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/756,999 (Holt et al.), all filed November 26, 1996, all of which are incorporated herein by reference), the overall structure of the cleaning pad is important to cleaning performance, as discussed in pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 09/037,379 of N.J. Poliicchio et al., filed March 10, 1998, all of which are incorporated herein by reference. In particular, for pads having a substantially flat surface that contacts the floor (i.e., a substantially planar surface for contact with the soiled surface during cleaning), cleaning efficiency is not maximized because the soil removed tends to accumulate at the periphery of the pad, particularly at the front and rear edges. There is thus a significant surface area of the pad that does not come into close contact with the floor during the cleaning operation. An important aspect of cleaning efficiency is related to the ability to provide a cleaning pad having a plurality of cleaning surfaces or edges, all of which come into contact with the soiled surface during the cleaning operation. In the context of a cleaning device,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -76-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

such as a mop, these surfaces or edges are arranged such that during the typical cleaning action (i.e., when the device is moved back and forth in a direction substantially parallel to the Y dimension or width of the pad), each of the surfaces or edges comes into contact with the surface to be cleaned as a result of the "back and forth" movement of the cleaning pad. The effect of a plurality of edges is achieved by forming the pad to have a plurality of widths in its Z dimension. These plurality of widths form a plurality of surfaces or edges along the front and back of the pad. This preferred embodiment of the invention and the advantages achieved thereby will be explained in more detail with reference to the drawings.

The present pads which provide multiple surfaces or edges during cleaning address this subject matter and provide improved performance. Referring to Figure 1 of the drawings, there is shown a cleaning pad 100 having an upper surface 103 which enables the pad to be releasably secured to a handle. The cleaning pad 100 further has a lower surface, generally designated 110, which comes into contact with the floor or other hard surface during cleaning. In this embodiment, the lower surface 110 is comprised of three substantially planar surfaces 112, 114, and 116. These separate surfaces are created by reducing the width of the cleaning pad 100 in the Z dimension of the pad. As shown, the planes corresponding to surfaces 112 and 116 intersect the plane corresponding to surface 114. Thus, when a cleaning device to which the pad 100 is attached is moved from rest in the direction indicated by arrow Yf, friction causes the pad 100 to "pivot" such that the lower surface 112 comes into contact with the surface to be cleaned. As the movement in the Yf direction decreases, the lower surface 114 comes into contact with the surface to be cleaned. When the device and pad are moved from rest in the direction indicated by arrow Yb, friction causes the pad 100 to pivot such that the lower surface 116 comes into contact with the surface to be cleaned. As this cleaning motion is repeated, the area of the pad in contact with the soiled surface changes.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -77-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

constantly. As a result, larger surface areas of the pad come into contact with the floor or other hard surfaces during use, compared to a substantially flat cleaning pad.

Although the pad shown in Figure 1 is illustrated as having a continuous decrease in width from the top to the bottom of the pad, it may be preferable to provide layer widths that vary discontinuously. For example, as shown in Figure 4b, the absorption layer may be constructed of three separate layers which have a smaller width toward the scrubbing layer. (This means that the layers of the absorption layer become discontinuously narrower downward toward the scrubbing layer.) Furthermore, the discontinuity of these decreasing widths results in a plurality of edges in the form of the leading edges and trailing edges of the layers 405, 407 and 409. It is believed that this plurality of edges enables even better capture of particles. Of course, the effect of multiple discrete edges can also be achieved by using more or fewer discrete layers in the absorption layer. Alternatively, the effect can be achieved, for example, by using a moldable material as the absorption layer (i.e. providing a single-layer absorption layer), using a device whose topography is transferred to the pad, etc.

It will be understood that while the above discussion primarily deals with cleaning pads having two or three layers that decrease in width to achieve the desired decrease in overall pad width in the Z dimension, it may nevertheless be preferable to use more than three discrete layers, particularly when the individual layers are relatively thin. Of course, as discussed above, in certain embodiments only one discrete layer will be provided, e.g., when molding a material to produce the desired decreasing width.

It is further to be understood that, although the above discussion refers to the absorption or device for achieving the desired decrease in width in the Z dimension, the desired effect can also be achieved by using an absorption layer of uniform width but using a scrubbing layer or other material which

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -78-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ches has a smaller width than the absorption layer.
E. Functional cuffs used, if applicable

An essential feature of the preferred cleaning pads and/or cloths of the present invention is the provision of one or more freely movable functional sleeves. Applicants have surprisingly found that functional sleeves improve the cleaning performance of conventional cleaning pads and cloths as well as the cleaning pads and cloths of the present invention. Functional sleeves result in improved capture of particles in both conventional cleaning pads and cloths and the cleaning pads and cloths of the present invention. When a cleaning pad and/or cloth having functional sleeves is wiped back and forth on a hard surface, the functional sleeves "flip" from side to side, thereby picking up and trapping particulate material. Cleaning pads and cloths having functional sleeves exhibit improved capture and trapping of particulate material typically found on hard surfaces and exhibit a reduced tendency for this particulate material to be re-deposited on the cleaned surface.

Functional cuffs may comprise a variety of materials including, without limitation, carded polypropylene, rayon or polyester, hydroentangled polyester, spunbonded polypropylene, polyester, polyethylene or cotton, polypropylene, or blends thereof. When freely movable functional cuffs are used, the material used for the functional cuffs should be sufficiently stiff to allow the cuffs to "flip" from side to side without collapsing or rolling over on themselves. The stiffness of the functional cuffs may be improved by using high basis weight materials (e.g., materials having a basis weight of about 30 g/m ² or more) or by adding other materials that improve stiffness such as reinforcing materials, adhesives, elastomers, elastic materials, foams, sponges, scrubbing layers and the like, or by laminating the materials together. Preferably, the functional cuffs comprise

TER MEER STEIN'MEiST*ER"& PARTNER GbR -79-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Cuffs are a water-entangled substrate including, but not limited to, polyester, cotton, polypropylene, and blends thereof having a basis weight of at least about 20 g/m ² and a reinforcing material for stiffening.

The functional sleeves may be in the form of a single-layer or multi-layer laminate structure and in the form of a loop or non-loop structure. Preferably, the functional sleeves have a loop as shown in Figures 2, 4a and 4b of the drawings. A loop-shaped functional sleeve may be obtained by folding a strip of a sleeve material in half to form a loop and then attaching the material to the substrate. Loopless functional sleeves may also be used, particularly if the material used has sufficient rigidity. The cleaning pads and wipes of the invention may also have a combination of loop-shaped and/or non-loop-shaped, single-layer and/or multi-layer functional sleeves. In addition, the functional sleeves may have an absorbent layer as described below.

Functional cuffs may be formed as an integral part of the bottom layer of the cleaning pad of the present invention or the substrate of the present cleaning cloth, or may be separately attached to the cleaning pad and/or cloth. When the functional cuffs are an integral part of the bottom layer of the cleaning pad and/or cloth, the functional cuffs are preferably in the form of a looped functional cuff obtained by folding the bottom layer of the cleaning pad or the substrate of the cleaning cloth, for example in the form of a Z-fold and/or a C-fold. Alternatively, the functional cuffs may be separately attached to the bottom layer of a cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth by any of a variety of methods known in the art, including, without limitation, double-sided adhesive tape, heat bonding, gluing, ultrasonic welding, sewing, high pressure mechanical welding, and the like.

Functional cuffs can be incorporated into traditional cleaning pads and cloths, which are well known in themselves and which include a variety of cellulose and nonwoven materials, such as sponges,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER "& PARTNER GbR - so -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

me, foams, paper towels, polishing cloths, dust cloths, cotton towels and the like, which may be in both dry and pre-moistened form. In a preferred embodiment, the functional sleeves are particularly effective when incorporated into the cleaning pads of the present invention, as well as those described in pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/756,507 (Holt et al.), pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/756,864 (Sherry et al.), and pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/756,999 (Holt et al.), all filed November 26, 1996; and in pending U.S. patent application Serial No. 09/037,379 (Policicchio et al.), filed March 10, 1998, which applications are hereby incorporated by reference.

In another preferred embodiment, a cleaning sheet comprises one or more functional cuffs and a substrate, preferably a nonwoven substrate in the form of a water-entangled material, including, but not limited to, those substrates disclosed in the copending applications of Fereshtehkhou et al., U.S. Serial No. 09/082,349, filed May 20, 1998 (Case 6664M); Fereshtehkhou et al., U.S. Serial No. 09/082,396, filed May 20, 1998 (Case 6798M), which are hereby incorporated by reference; and U.S. Patent No. 5,525,397, issued June 11, 1996 to Shizuno et al. In this preferred embodiment, the cleaning sheet has at least two regions, which regions differ in their basis weight. The substrate may have one or more high basis weight regions of from about 30 to about 120 g/m ² , preferably from about 40 to about 100 g/m ² , more preferably from about 50 to about 90 g/m ² , and even more preferably from about 60 to about 80 g/m ² , and one or more low basis weight regions, wherein the low basis weight regions have a basis weight that is no more than about 80%, preferably no more than about 60%, more preferably no more than about 40%, and even more preferably no more than about 20% of the basis weight of the high basis weight region(s). The substrate of the cleaning cloth preferably has a total basis weight of from about 20 to about 110 g/m ² , more preferably from about 40 to about 100 g/m ² , and even more preferably from about 60 to about 90 g/m ² .

You can attach one or more functional cuffs to a variety of

··

·

TER MEER STEI1W!PrsrER* ^: & PARTNER GbR - ei -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

of locations of the pads or cloths or formed as an integral part of the cleaning pads or cloths. For example, the functional cuff(s) may be arranged along the centerline of the cleaning pad or cloth (in the X-Y plane) in either the X dimension or the Y dimension. Preferably, the cleaning pad or cloth comprises two functional cuffs arranged at or near opposite edges (i.e., in the front and rear edges of the pad and/or cloth, relative to the Y dimension) of the cleaning pad or cloth. Preferably, the functional cuff(s) is/are arranged at a location such that its longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the direction of forward and backward movement of the mop or cloth during use by the consumer.

Cleaning pads having one or more functional cuffs are shown as examples in Figures 2, 4a and 4b of the drawings.

Figure 2 shows a perspective view of a cleaning pad 200 having a freely movable, loop-shaped functional cuff 207. The loop-shaped functional cuff 207 has two surfaces 209 and 211. During a typical cleaning process, such as mopping or wiping, the cleaning pad 200 is moved forward in the Yf direction and then backward in the Yb direction over the surface to be cleaned. As the cleaning pad 200 is moved in the Yf direction, the functional cuff 207 folds over such that its surface 211 is in contact with the surface to be cleaned. Particulate matter present on the surface to be cleaned is picked up by the surface 211 of the functional cuff 207. As the cleaning pad 200 is then moved in the Yb direction, the functional cuff 207 folds over such that its other surface 209 is in contact with the surface to be cleaned. The particulate material initially picked up by the surface 211 is thereby trapped between the surface 211 of the functional sleeve 207 and the layer 201 of the cleaning pad 200. The surface 209 of the functional sleeve 207 is then able to pick up additional particulate material.

Fig. 4a and 4b show a cleaning pad 400 which has two freely movable, loop-shaped functional cuffs 411 and 413 similar to the functional cuff 207 of Fig. 2. As shown in Fig. 4b, in a typical cleaning process, the cleaning pad 400

TER MEER STEINWFfSTER"& PARTNER GbR -82-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

in the Yf direction over a hard surface such that the functional sleeves 411 and 413 are folded over such that the surfaces 417 and 425 come into contact with the surface to be cleaned and are capable of picking up particulate material. The cleaning pad 400 is then moved in the Yb direction over the hard surface, resulting in the functional sleeves 411 and 413 being folded over such that the surfaces 419 and 423 come into contact with the surface to be cleaned. The particulate material picked up by the surface 425 is trapped between the surface 425 and the scrubbing layer 401. The surfaces 419 and 423 are then capable of picking up additional particulate material from the surface to be cleaned. As the cleaning pad 400 is moved back over the hard surface in the Yf direction, the additional particulate material is trapped between the surface 423 and the abrasive layer 401. When one or more functional cuffs are arranged in cleaning pads with multiple width layers in the Z direction, as shown in Figure 4b, the height (i.e., the Z dimension of the fully expanded functional cuff) of the functional cuff is large enough so that when the functional cuff folds toward the centerline of the cleaning pad, it covers the layer with the smallest width. Figure 4a shows a cleaning pad 400 having two functional cuffs 411 and 413, with the functional cuffs 411 and 413 both folded toward the centerline of the cleaning pad, which is preferred for packaging the cleaning pad 400 for sale.

F. Density gradient used, if applicable

Applicants have found that the introduction of a density gradient into the absorbent layer(s) of the cleaning pad of the invention has an important effect on the cleaning performance and the ability of the cleaning pad to absorb liquids, particularly liquids containing particulate materials. Although density gradients have been used in absorbent articles such as diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence pads and the like, applicants have surprisingly found that specific density gradients uniquely

TER MEER STEHTIVIETSrER'^ PARTNER GbR -83-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

are useful for the absorbent layer of cleaning pads. Density gradients in cleaning pads are unique for at least two identifiable reasons. First, the absorbent layer of a cleaning pad must absorb liquids containing both dissolved components and undissolved, suspended components such as insoluble particulate materials. In the case of diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence pads and the like, the absorbent layer typically only needs to absorb liquids containing dissolved components such as body fluids. Second, the absorbent layer of a cleaning pad must absorb the liquid against the force of gravity. In diapers, sanitary napkins, incontinence pads and the like, the liquid is typically guided into the absorbent layer under the influence of gravity and is distributed throughout the absorbent layer. Furthermore, as will be described below, sufficient elasticity of the cleaning pad is important for maintaining good cleaning performance, particularly in cleaning pads having a density gradient. The preferred cleaning pads having the specific density gradients described herein demonstrate improvements in at least three important properties that affect the effectiveness in cleaning hard surfaces, namely:

absorption (the time required to transfer the liquid from the surface to be cleaned to the absorbent layer(s) of the cleaning pad), distribution (the absorbency of the absorbent layer(s) to utilize as much of the pad as possible) and rewetting (the amount of contaminated liquid retained within the absorbent layer(s) and not squeezed out again during a cleaning process).

The absorbent layer may comprise a single absorbent layer having a continuous density gradient in the Z dimension of the cleaning pad or a plurality of absorbent layers having different densities resulting in a density gradient. A continuous density gradient is one in which the material forming the cleaning pad is homogeneous but has different densities throughout the material. A method for creating a continuous density gradient is described in U.S. Patent 4,818,315, issued April 4, 1989 to Hellgren et al., which is hereby incorporated by reference. Preferably, the cleaning pad of the invention comprises a density gradient which

TER MEER STEINMERSTER'X PARTNER GbR -84-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM - 01/21/2003

is provided by a plurality, preferably three, absorbent layers each having a different density. A density gradient is typically "strong" when the density of the absorbent layers increases from a lower absorbent layer to an upper absorbent layer. Preferably, the present cleaning pads comprise a "strong" density gradient which allows for rapid absorption, better utilization of the core by effectively wicking up liquid in the Z and XY directions, and a reduced tendency to squeeze out the absorbed liquids, particularly those containing undissolved particulate materials. A strong density gradient preferably comprises at least two absorbent layers having a first absorbent layer having a density of about 0.01 g/cm ³ to about 0.15 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.03 g/cm ³ to about 0.1 g/cm ³ , and more preferably about 0.04 g/cm ³ to about 0.06 g/cm ³ , and a second absorbent layer having a density of about 0.04 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.1 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ , and more preferably about 0.12 g/cm ³ to about 0.17 g/cm ³ ; the density of the first absorbent layer being about 0.04 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.07 g/cm ³ , and more preferably about 0.1 g/cm ³ less than the density of the second absorbent layer.

In a preferred embodiment, the present cleaning pad comprises a density gradient resulting from three absorbent layers, the first absorbent layer having a density of about 0.01 g/cm ³ to about 0.08 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.03 g/cm ³ to about 0.06 g/cm ³ , the second absorbent layer having a density of about 0.03 g/cm ³ to about 0.12 g/cm ³ , preferably about 0.07 g/cm ³ to about 0.1 g/cm ³ , and the third absorbent layer having a density of about 0.05 g/cm ³ to about 0.2 g/cm ³ , more preferably about 0.08 g/cm ³ to about 0.15 g/cm ³ ; wherein the density difference between the first absorption layer and the second absorption layer and between the second absorption layer and the third absorption layer is at least about 0.02 g/cm ³ , preferably at least about 0.4 g/cm ³ .

According to another preferred embodiment, shown in Fig. 4b of the drawings, the cleaning pad 400 comprises a first absorbent layer 405 having a density of about 0.05 g/cm ³ , a second absorbent layer 407 having a density of about 0.1 g/cm ³ and a third absorbent layer 409 having a density of about 0.15 g/cm ³ . It is understood that

VI -i IM &iacgr;.·:

TER MEER STEINWIETSTER'S PARTNER GbR -85-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

that such a density gradient can be present in a cleaning pad with or without layers of different width in the Z dimension, as shown in Fig. 4b.

As a result of the density gradient, the porosity, i.e. the ratio of the volume of the interstices of a material to the volume of its mass of the absorbent layer, typically decreases as the density increases. Porosity is important, particularly with respect to cleaning pads for cleaning hard surfaces, because the liquid to be absorbed by the cleaning pad contains small amounts of relatively large particle size particulate material. As the dirty liquid penetrates through the scrubbing layer into the cleaning pad, the larger particulate material becomes trapped in the interstices between the absorbent layers. As the porosity of the absorbent layers decreases, the density increases and the larger particulate material is trapped in the larger interstices of the lower absorbent layers, while the remaining liquid is then transferred to the upper absorbent layers. This allows easier transfer of the liquid towards the higher density layers and enables the particulate material to be trapped in the interstices of the lower absorbent layers. As a result, the cleaning pad holds both liquid and particulate material much more effectively than cleaning pads without a strong density gradient.

When an absorbent layer has a density of less than about 0.1 g/cm ³ , the layer tends to be less elastic, which is another important property for the present cleaning pad, as will be explained below. To increase the elasticity of an absorbent layer having a relatively low density, a thermoplastic material, preferably a bicomponent fiber, is combined with the fibers of the absorbent layer. Upon melting, at least a portion of this thermoplastic material migrates to the intersections of the fibers, typically as a result of interfiber capillary gradients. These intersections then become bonding sites for the thermoplastic material. Upon cooling, the thermoplastic materials solidify at these intersections to form bonding sites that hold the matrix or web of fibers together in each of the respective layers. This can be beneficial to provide additional strength to the cleaning pad.

? 9w · &PSgr;&psgr; w &psgr;&tgr; »

TER MEER STEINM ETSTER'X PARTNER GbR -86-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

velvet integrity. Although bicomponent fibers are known to those skilled in the art, they are typically used in amounts of less than about 15%. Applicants have found that to achieve the desired resiliency, an absorbent layer having a density of less than about 0.05 g/cm ³ comprises at least about 20%, preferably at least about 30%, more preferably at least about 40%, of a thermoplastic material such as a bicomponent fiber. A preferred bicomponent fiber comprises a copolyolefin bicomponent fiber having at least about 81% polyethylene terephthalate core and less than about 51% copolyolefin sheath and is commercially available from Hoechst Celanese Corporation under the trademark CELBOND® T-255.

G. Adhesive scrubbing strips to be used if necessary

The cleaning pads of the present invention may optionally include adhesive scrubbing strips to enhance the ability of the present pads to remove tough soils. The scrubbing strips typically used herein are made from materials commonly used to make scrubbing pads. Such materials are typically comprised of polymer blends with or without specific abrasives. Typical polymers used include nylon, polyester, polypropylene, and blends thereof. Nylon is the most preferred material because it provides greater stiffness and durability compared to polyester and polypropylene. Abrasive materials may be combined with the polymers to increase mechanical scrubbing ability. For example, 3M Scotch Brite® scrubbing pads are made from nylon fibers combined with silicon carbide and/or aluminum oxide and/or calcium carbonate as abrasives. Depending on the desired level of scrubbing, the amount and type of abrasive may be adjusted accordingly. Alternatively, adhesive scrubbing strips made of only one polymer or polymer blends combined with binders or with hardening adhesives without any abrasives can be used if the surface must be protected during scrubbing.

An alternative to using materials found in typical scrubbing pads is to use brushes whose bristles do the scrubbing. Such bristles are typically made of polymers

TER MEER STEINEFSTEFTÄ PARTNER GbR -87-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

1 or polymer blends with or without abrasives. In the context of brushes, nylon bristles are again preferred due to their stiffness, strength and/or durability. A preferred nylon bristle is that commercially available under the brand Tynex® 612 Nylon from 3M Corp. These bristles exhibit lower water absorption compared to commercially available nylon 66. Reducing the ability of the present scrubbing strips to absorb water is important because water absorption reduces the stiffness of the bristle and reduces re-expansion after compression during scrubbing.

A third way of creating a scrubbing strip is to use mesh or reinforcing materials to form the scrubbing strip. Again, the mesh or reinforcing material is typically formed from a polymer or polymer blend, either with or without an abrasive. The mesh or reinforcing material is typically wrapped around a secondary structure to achieve a certain fullness. The shape of the holes in the mesh can be a variety of shapes, such as squares, rectangles, diamonds, hexagons, or mixtures thereof, without any limitation. Typically, the smaller the areas formed by the holes in the mesh, the greater the scrubbing power. This is mainly due to the fact that there are then a larger number of points where intersections with the reinforcing material occur. These intersections are typically the areas that come into contact with the ground. An alternative to wrapping with mesh or reinforcing materials is to apply melt-extruded polymers directly to the secondary structure, such as a fleece. After curing, the polymer forms higher dots of stiffer material compared to the secondary nonwoven material, thereby achieving the abrasion resistance.

The dimensions of the scrubbing strip have a significant impact on the structure's ability to remove stains and dirt. In addition to the dimension, the force applied can also significantly affect the scrubbing properties. The force applied is often determined by the location where the scrubbing strip is applied on the mop or pad.

The adhesive scrubbing strip used herein is preferably rectangular in shape. The X-dimension of the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically about 10 mm to about 300 mm, preferably about 30 mm to about

TER MEER STEIWMETSTER"& PARTNER GbR -88-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

190 mm, and more preferably about 50 mm to about 75 mm. The Y dimension of the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically about 5 mm to about 50 mm, preferably about 10 mm to about 40 mm, and more preferably about 15 mm to about 30 mm. The Z dimension (thickness) of the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically about 1 mm to about 20 mm, preferably about 2 mm to about 15 mm, and more preferably about 3 mm to about 10 mm.

The X and Y dimensions of the adhesive scrubbing strip typically affect the removal of tough stains from hard surfaces. In general, smaller X and Y dimensions of the scrubbing strip result in more effective removal of tough stains from the cleaning pad and/or device. Reducing the dimensions of the scrubbing strip typically results in a proportional reduction in the number of wipes required to remove the adherent strip from the hard surface being cleaned. Increasing the Z dimension (thickness) of the scrubbing strip also typically results in better removal of tough stains. Improving tough stain removal by varying the dimensions of the scrubbing strip generally applies to scrubbing strips comprising a variety of materials. Additionally, increasing the Z dimension (thickness) of the scrub strip allows for the use of softer materials, such as nylon without abrasive material, in the scrub strip while achieving a similar level of tough stain removal compared to scrub strips containing harder materials, such as polypropylene. Furthermore, tough stain removal can also be improved by incorporating a blend of materials into the scrub strip, such as nylon and abrasive materials such as silicon carbide, aluminum oxide, calcium carbonate, and the like, or a combination of a polyester core wrapped in a nylon mesh.

The ratio of an area of a surface of the cleaning pad to an area of a surface of the adhesive scrubbing strip is typically about 840:1 to about 3:1, preferably about 140:1 to about 6:1, and more preferably about 56:1 to about 15:1.

Examples of scrubbing strips used in the present invention include the following dimensions (expressed as (Y dimension) x (X dimension) x (Z dimension)) of 32 mm x 267 mm x 8 mm; 32 mm x 64 mm x 8 mm; 32 mm x 64 mm x 5 mm; and 32 mm x 64 mm x 10 mm, but these are not limiting factors.

TER MEER STElTflviE1Sffer"& PARTNER GbR -89-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

restriction.

i. Attach the adhesive scrubbing strip to the cleaning

According to one embodiment, the adhesive scrubbing strip is attached directly to a cleaning pad according to the invention. This enables scrubbing and yet encourages more frequent discarding of the adhesive scrubbing strip. This can be accomplished by attaching the scrubbing strip to the pad during actual manufacture or by designing a separate scrubbing strip such that it can be attached by the consumer via a peel and stick adhesive or by means of a loop and hook type hook and loop fastener (with the hooks on the pad). In this regard, the consumer can choose whether or not to attach a scrubbing strip to the cleaning pad. If the consumer needs a scrubbing strip, he or she can simply attach it to the pad or use a pad with a scrubbing strip already attached.

In an embodiment where the scrubbing strip is attached directly to the pad, it is important to have optimal dimensions of the scrubbing strip, particularly in relation to the dimensions of the cleaning pad. The scrubbing strip must be sufficiently small and thin so that fluid absorption into the cleaning pad and/or cloth is not adversely affected. Typically, the most preferred position for the scrubbing strip is in the center of the cleaning pad since this is the area where the greatest pressure can be exerted. Figures 4a and 4b show a cleaning pad 400 according to the invention having an adhesive scrubbing strip 430 attached to a liquid permeable scrubbing layer 401, the scrubbing strip 430 being generally located in the center of the lower surface of the cleaning pad 400. Alternatively, the scrubbing strip may be located at the outer ends of the pad, however, this is usually less effective and, if functional cuffs are located on the cleaning pad, it may interfere with the proper functioning of the cuffs of a cleaning pad having functional cuffs that move forward and backward. A preferred method of achieving scrubbing across the functional cuffs is to

TER MEER STEELTTlWE*fST*ER*'& PARTNER GbR - 90 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

to arrange a mesh or reinforcing material around the cuffs to increase their rigidity and strength.

ii. Effective scrubbing versus surface safety
5

Although achieving effective scrubbing is important to facilitate the removal of stubborn dirt and stains, it is important that this be done without damaging the surface being scrubbed.

An adhesive scrubbing strip constructed from a polymer (preferably nylon) and without abrasive material provides the best balance between removal of stuck-on stains and surface safety. Self-adhesive scrubbing strips, which contain higher levels of abrasive material, are particularly prone to damaging the surfaces being cleaned. Furthermore, a scrubbing strip constructed from a nylon bristle brush is less likely to damage the surface.

Another important consideration is a comparison of a scrubbing strip attached to a mop head with one attached to a cleaning pad. A scrubbing strip attached to a cleaning pad typically exhibits greater surface damage than a scrubbing strip located on the leading edge of a mop head. Without being limited to theoretical considerations, it is believed that this greater surface damage is the result of the smaller dimension of the scrubbing strip and the ability to apply higher pressures when the scrubbing strip is attached to a cleaning pad so that the mop head is in a flat position. When a scrubbing strip is located on the leading edge of a mop head, the mop head must be tilted and rotated 90° to allow the application of lower pressures.

Overall, the most preferred way to effectively scrub while maintaining sufficient safety for the surface is to use a scrubbing strip that is predominantly made of a polymer, preferably nylon, and has little or no abrasives.

• · t ·

TER MEER STemiviersf"eV ^: c\ PARTNER GbR - 9i-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

iii. Method of using a cleaning pad with adhesive

Scrub strips

The effective removal of stubborn stains can be facilitated by combining a specific product design with specific application conditions.

Effective removal of stubborn stains can be defined as the ability to remove a stubborn stain from the surface without producing adverse results in terms of: (1) damage to the surface, (2) final appearance of the floor, (3) effort required for scrubbing, and (4) convenience and ease of application.

In order to balance these 4 factors, it is preferable that the removal of stubborn stains be approached systematically. Rather than attempting to achieve removal of stubborn stains by mechanical abrasion alone, it is preferable that removal of stubborn stains be achieved by a combination of mechanical abrasion and chemical action. Specific instructions are provided for this purpose. For example, the consumer may be instructed, with the aid of pictures and/or words, that for best results, to first saturate stubborn stains and soils with a cleaning solution and soak for a few minutes, and then to gently but firmly scrub the stubborn stain or soil until it is removed. If appropriate, additional instructions may be added stating that a scrubbing strip may scratch certain plastic or painted surfaces and that a test should be carried out in a less visible area before use.

H. Fragrance carrier complex, if used

The cleansing pads of the present invention may contain an effective amount of various moisture-activated encapsulated fragrance particles as an optional ingredient. The encapsulated particles act as protective carriers and reduce fragrance loss prior to application. Such materials include, for example, cyclo-

ta·· · »

TER MEER STE INTvI EtSTER^ PXrynER GbR -92-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

dextrin/fragrance inclusion complexes, polysaccharide cell matrix fragrance microcapsules and the like. Encapsulation of the fragrance minimizes diffusion and loss of the volatile blooming fragrance components. The fragrance is released when the materials are wetted, for example when a damp hard surface is wiped with a cleaning pad containing a fragrance carrier complex, so that a pleasant odor signal is provided upon use. Cyclodextrin inclusion complexes are particularly preferred.

The optionally used water activated protected fragrance carriers are very useful in the cleansing pads of the present invention. They allow for the use of lower levels of fragrance in the cleansing pads because there is less loss of fragrance during manufacture and use. Because the protected fragrance is used in the form of a dry powder rather than a liquid, the fragrance carrier complex can be readily incorporated into the present cleansing pads. Preferably, the fragrance carrier complex is incorporated into the absorbent layer of the present cleansing pad so that when the liquid is absorbed into the absorbent layer, the volatile, blooming fragrance materials are released and provide a pleasant fragrance signal to the user of the cleansing pad.

Furthermore, after the cleaning pad is discarded, a small amount of the volatile fragrance materials remain which mask any unpleasant odors that may develop in the cleaning pad as a result of the contaminated cleaning solution contained in the absorbent layer of the cleaning pad. When the preferred cyclodextrin inclusion complexes are used, the cyclodextrin can absorb any unpleasant odors that may develop after the cleaning pad is discarded and begins to dry out.

Because of the minimal loss of volatile components of the blooming fragrance compositions achieved by the water-activated protective fragrance carrier, the fragrance compositions, if incorporated therein, can contain lower amounts of blooming fragrance ingredients than if used in free, unencapsulated form. The encapsulated and/or complexed fragrance compositions typically contain at least about 20%, preferably at least about 30%, and more preferably at least

TER MEER STEI ^< Kl'lvi£fST"ER ⁱ '& PARTNER GbR -93-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

about 40% blooming fragrance ingredients. Optionally, but preferably, compositions containing encapsulated and/or complexed fragrances may also contain free fragrances to provide a positive fragrance signal to the consumer before the cleansing pad is used.

i. Cyclodextrin

The term "cyclodextrin" used herein includes all known cyclodextrins, such as unsubstituted cyclodextrins, which have six to twelve glucose units, in particular alpha-, beta- and gamma-cyclodextrins and/or derivatives and/or mixtures thereof. Alpha-cyclodextrin consists of 6, beta-cyclodextrin of 7 and gamma-cyclodextrin of 8 glucose units arranged in a ring. The specific coupling and conformation of the glucose units gives the cyclodextrins a rigid, conical molecular structure with an internal cavity of specific volume. The "lining" of the internal cavity is formed by hydrogen atoms and glycosidic bridging oxygen atoms, so that this surface is quite hydrophobic. These cavities can be completely or partially filled with an organic molecule of suitable size, forming an "inclusion complex". Alpha-, beta- and gamma-cyclodextrins can be obtained from, among others, the American Maize-Products Company (Amaizo), Hammond, Indiana.

Cyclodextrin derivatives are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,426,011, Parmerter et al., issued Feb. 4, 1969; 3,453,257, 3,453,258, 3,453,259, and 3,453,260, all issued July 1, 1969 to Parmerter et al.; 3,459,731, issued Aug. 5, 1969 to Gramera et al.; 3,553,191, issued Jan. 5, 1971 to Parmerter et al.; 3,565,887, issued Feb. 23, 1971 to Parmerter et al.; 4,535,152, issued Aug. 13, 1985 to Szejtli et al.; 4,616,008, issued on 7.

Oct. 1986 to Hirai et al.; 4,638,058, issued Jan. 20, 1987 to Brandt et al.; 4,746,734, issued May 24, 1988 to Tsuchiyama et al.; and 4,678,598, issued July 7, 1987 to Ogino et al., all of which patents are incorporated herein by reference. Examples of cyclodextrin derivatives suitable for use in the invention are methyl-beta-cyclodextrin, hydroxyethyl-beta-cyclodextrin and hydroxypropyl-beta-cyclodextrin of different degrees of substitution (D.S.), available from Amaizo; Wacker

TER MEER ST EINM ^fS f E R"^ PARTNER GbR -94-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Chemicals (USA), Inc.; and Aldrich Chemical Company. Water-soluble derivatives are also highly desirable.

The individual cyclodextrins can be linked, for example,

Use of multifunctional agents to form oligomers, polymers, etc. Examples of such materials are commercially available from Amaizo and from Aldrich Chemical Company (beta-cyclodextrin/epichlorohydrin copolymers).

The preferred cyclodextrin is beta-cyclodextrin. It is also desirable to use mixtures of cyclodextrins. Preferably, alpha-, beta- and/or gamma-cyclodextrins, and more preferably alpha- and beta-cyclodextrins, form the majority of the cyclodextrins. Some cyclodextrin mixtures are commercially available, for example from Ensuiko Sugar Refining Company, Yokohama, Japan.

ii. Formation of cyclodextrin/fragrance inclusion complexes

The fragrance/cyclodextrin inclusion complexes of the invention are prepared by any known method. Typically, the complexes are formed either by bringing the fragrance and cyclodextrin together in a suitable solvent, e.g. water, or preferably by kneading/slurrying the ingredients in the presence of a suitable, preferably minimal, amount of solvent, preferably water. The kneading/slurrying method is particularly desirable because it yields smaller complex particles and requires less solvent, thereby eliminating or reducing the need to further reduce particle size and remove excess solvent. Description of complex formation can be found in JL Atwood, JED Davies & DD MaxNichol (eds.): Inclusion Compounds. Vol. III . Academic Press (1984), particularly Chapter 11; JL Atwood and JED Davies (eds.): Proceedings of the Second International Symposium of Cyclodextrins . Tokyo, Japan (July 1984), and J. Szejtli, Cyclodextrin Technology . Kluwer Academic Publishers (1988), which publications are hereby incorporated by reference.

In general, the fragrance/cyclodextrin complexes have a molar ratio of fragrance compound to cyclodextrin of about 1:1. However, the molar ratio can be higher or lower depending on the size of the

TER MEER STEI NWETSTETi cTPARTNER GbR -95-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

fragrance compound and the identity of the cyclodextrin compound. The molar ratio can be controlled by forming a saturated solution of the cyclodextrin and adding the fragrance to form the complex. Generally, the complex will readily precipitate. If not, the complex can usually be precipitated by adding an electrolyte, changing the pH, cooling, etc. The complex can then be analyzed to determine the ratio of fragrance to cyclodextrin.

As indicated above, the actual complexes are determined by the size of the cavity in the cyclodextrin and the size of the fragrance molecule. Suitable complexes can be formed using mixtures of cyclodextrins since the fragrances are usually mixtures of materials that vary widely in size. Generally, it is desirable that at least the majority of the material be provided by alpha, beta and/or gamma cyclodextrin, more preferably beta cyclodextrin. The fragrance content in the beta cyclodextrin complex is typically from about 5% to about 15%, more usually from about 7% to about 12%.

Continuous complex formation generally requires the use of supersaturated solutions, kneading/slurrying techniques and/or temperature control, for example by heating and then either cooling, freeze drying, etc. The complexes are dried to a dry powder of the desired composition. In general, the least possible number of processing steps is preferred to avoid loss of fragrance.

iii. Matrix fragrance microcapsules

Water-soluble cellular matrix fragrance microcapsules are solid particles which contain the fragrance in stable form in the cells. The water-soluble matrix material comprises predominantly polysaccharide and polyhydroxy compounds. The polysaccharides are preferably higher polysaccharides of the non-sweet, colloidally soluble type, such as natural gums, for example gum arabic, starch derivatives, dextrinized and hydrolyzed starches and the like. The polyhydroxy compounds are preferably alcohols, plant-like sugars, lactones, monoethers and acetals. The cellular

TER MEER STEIWMTE1STE*h ^PARTNER GbR -96-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Matrix microcapsules useful in the present invention are prepared, for example, by (1) forming an aqueous phase containing the polysaccharide and the polyhydroxy compound in appropriate proportions with the addition of an emulsifier if necessary or desired; (2) emulsifying the fragrances in the aqueous phase; and (3) removing moisture while the mass is plastic or flowable, for example by spray drying drops of the emulsion. The matrix materials and details of the process are described, for example, in U.S. Patent No. 3,971,852, issued July 27, 1976 to Brenner et al., which patent is hereby incorporated by reference.

The present invention preferably uses minimal amounts of non-encapsulated, surface-present fragrance, preferably less than about 1%.

The moisture-activated fragrance microcapsules are commercially available, for example, as IN-CAP® from Polak's Frutal Works, Inc., Middletown, New York; and as the encapsulated fragrances Optilok System® from Encapsulated Technology, Inc., Nyack, New York.

The water-soluble matrix fragrance microcapsules preferably have a size of from about 0.5 μm to about 300 μm, more preferably from about 1 μm to about 200 μm, and even more preferably from about 2 μm to about 100 μm.

I. Other embodiments of cleaning pads and/or cloths

To improve the ability of the cleaning pad and/or the cleaning cloth to remove stubborn dirt residues and to increase the amount of cleaning fluid in contact with the surface to be cleaned, it may be desirable to incorporate a reinforcing material into the cleaning pad and/or cloth. The reinforcing material consists of a durable, tough material which imparts texture to the scrubbing layer of the pad and/or cloth, particularly when pressure is exerted on the pad and/or cloth during use. Preferably, the reinforcing material is introduced as part of the scrubbing layer or the absorption layer or can be arranged in the form of a separate layer, which is preferably present between the scrubbing layer and the absorption layer. According to a preferred embodiment, according to which the reinforcing material

TER MEER STEINIWEISTER & PARTNER GbR -97-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

al has the same X-Y dimensions as the entire cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth, it is preferred that the reinforcement material be incorporated such that it does not come into direct contact with the surface to be cleaned to any significant extent. This preserves the ability of the pad to be easily moved over the hard surface and prevents non-uniform removal of the cleaning solution used. When the reinforcement is part of the scrubbing layer, it is provided in an upper layer of this component. Of course, at the same time the reinforcement must be arranged sufficiently deep in the pad and/or cloth to be able to perform its scrubbing function. Thus, when the reinforcement is provided as part of the absorption layer, it will be present in a lower layer thereof. According to a separate embodiment, it may be desirable to arrange the reinforcement such that it is in direct contact with the surface to be cleaned.

In addition to the importance of properly arranging the reinforcement, it is important that the reinforcement does not significantly impair the flow of fluid through the pad. The reinforcement is therefore a relatively open fabric or fleece.

The reinforcement material may be any material that can be processed to produce a tough, open textured fabric. Such materials include polyolefins (e.g., polyethylene and polypropylene), polyesters, polyamides, and the like. Those skilled in the art will recognize that these different materials have different degrees of hardness. Accordingly, the hardness of the reinforcement material can be controlled depending on the end use of the pad/device.

If the reinforcement is incorporated as a discrete layer, many commercial sources of such materials are available (see, for example, Design No. VO1230 available from Conwed Plastics, Minneapolis, MN). Alternatively, the reinforcement can be incorporated by printing a resin or other synthetic material (e.g., a latex) onto a substrate as described in U.S. Patent No. 4,745,021, issued May 17, 1988 to Ping, III et al., and U.S. Patent No. 4,733,774, issued March 29, 1988 to Ping, III et al., which patents are incorporated herein by reference.

The various layers that make up the cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth can be connected by any means that provide the pad with sufficient cohesion during

TER MEER STEINweTSTER &' PARTNER GbR -98-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The scrubbing layers and attachment layers may be bonded to the absorbent layer or to each other by a variety of bonding techniques, including the application of a uniform continuous adhesive layer, a patterned adhesive layer, or any arrangement of the adhesive in the form of lines, spirals, or patches. Alternatively, the bonding technique may include the application of heat points, pressure points, ultrasonic bonding, dynamic mechanical bonds, or other suitable bonding processes or combinations of these bonding techniques known to those skilled in the art. Bonding may occur at the periphery of the cleaning pad (for example, by heat sealing the scrubbing layer and optionally the attachment layer and/or the reinforcing material) and/or across the surface (i.e., in the X-Y plane) of the cleaning pad to thereby form a pattern on the surface of the cleaning pad. Bonding the layers of the cleaning pad by ultrasonic bonding across the surface of the pad provides integrity while avoiding shearing of the discrete layers of the pad during use. Functional cuffs can be attached to the abrasive layer and/or the absorbent layer using similar joining techniques including needling as is known per se.

"Resilient" is an important property of the cleaning pads of the present invention. A highly resilient cleaning pad is capable of absorbing and retaining liquids more effectively than less resilient cleaning pads. When the cleaning pad has layers of varying widths in the Z dimension, the resilience of the cleaning pad allows it to maintain the "inverted pyramid" structure even under the pressures encountered during a typical cleaning operation, such as wet mopping. The term "resilient" as used with the present cleaning pads refers to the ability of a cleaning pad to "spring back" to its original thickness (measured in the Z dimension) after being compressed downward parallel to its Z dimension. The resilience of a cleaning pad is measured as a percentage of the original thickness as described in the "Test Methods" section below. Briefly, a cleaning pad is saturated with an aqueous, nonionic buffered solution. Then the original thickness of the cleaning pad (in the Z dimension) is

TER MEER STEItfM'El'STER &"PA*RTNER GbR -99-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

A downward pressure (equivalent to about 1724 Pa (0.25 psi)) is then applied to the cleaning pad parallel to its Z dimension. The compressive force is then removed and the thickness of the cleaning pad is measured after a period of 30 seconds. Resilience is calculated as a percentage corresponding to the ratio of the thickness after compression under pressure to the original thickness before any pressure was applied. Preferably, the cleaning pads of the present invention exhibit a resiliency of at least about 95%, more preferably at least about 98%, even more preferably at least about 100%, and even more preferably at least about 105%. A cleaning pad may have a resiliency of greater than 100%, particularly when the cleaning pad contains a superabsorbent material as described herein.

The cleaning pads preferably have an absorbency, measured under a compressive pressure of 620 Pa (0.09 psi) after 20 minutes (1200 seconds) (hereinafter referred to as "ti2oo absorbency") of at least about 5 grams of deionized water per gram of the cleaning pad. The absorbency of the pad is measured 20 minutes (1200 seconds) after contact with deionized water, which is the typical time it takes the consumer to clean a hard surface such as a floor. The compressive pressure represents the typical pressures applied to the pad during the cleaning process. Accordingly, the cleaning pad should be able to absorb significant amounts of the cleaning solution within this 1200 second period at a pressure of 620 Pa (0.09 psi). The cleaning pad preferably has a ti2oo absorbent capacity of at least about 10 g/g, more preferably at least about 15 g/g, even more preferably at least about 20 g/g, and most preferably about 30 g/g. The cleaning pad preferably has a tgoo absorbent capacity of at least about 5 g/g, even more preferably a tgoo absorbent capacity of at least about 15 g/g.

The ti2oo and tgoo absorption capacity values are measured using the Performance under Pressure (hereinafter referred to as "PUP") method, which is described in more detail in the "Test Methods" section below.

Preferably, but not necessarily, the cleaning pads further have a total fluid capacity (for deionized water) of at least about 100 g, more preferably at least about 200 g, even more preferably

TER MEER STEIMVTEISTER &" PARTNER GbR - 100 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

at least about 300 g, and most preferably at least about 400 g. While pads with a total fluid capacity of less than 100 g are possible according to the invention, they are less suitable for cleaning large areas such as would be found in a typical household than higher capacity pads.

The cleaning pad of the present invention should also be able to retain fluid even under the pressure applied during the cleaning process. This is referred to herein as the ability of the cleaning pad to avoid "squeezing" or "squeezing out" of the absorbed fluid, or conversely, its ability to retain the absorbed fluid under pressure. The method for measuring squeezing out is described in the Test Methods section. Briefly, this test measures the ability of a saturated cleaning pad to retain fluid when subjected to a pressure of 1724 Pa (0.25 psi). Preferably, the cleaning pads of the present invention have a squeezing out value of no more than about 40%, more preferably no more than about 25%, even more preferably no more than about 15%, and most preferably no more than about 10%.

The cleaning device and/or cleaning pad according to the invention is preferably used in combination with a hard surface cleaning composition as described above.

The present invention further relates to methods for using the cleaning device, cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth according to the invention. The methods comprise cleaning a hard surface, preferably inanimate surfaces. A preferred method of use comprises the measure of contacting or wiping a preferably inanimate hard surface with a cleaning device, a cleaning pad and/or a cleaning cloth as described above. The method preferably comprises a typical surface cleaning method, which includes, but is not limited to, wiping, mopping or scrubbing.

The present invention further relates to devices comprising a cleaning device according to the invention, cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth in combination with instructions for use. The term "in combination with" used herein means that the instructions for use

TER MEER STEIhJWrETSTER & PARTNER GbR - 101 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

either printed directly on the cleaning implement, cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth as such or present in a separate manner including, but not limited to, a brochure, printed instructions, electronic instructions and/or verbal communication communicating the instructions for use to the user of an article of manufacture. The instructions for use preferably comprise instructions for cleaning a hard, preferably inanimate surface by contacting or wiping the surface with a cleaning implement, cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth. When the cleaning pad and/or cloth is one which is used together with a handle to form a cleaning implement, such as a cleaning pad with an attachment layer, the article of manufacture preferably comprises a cleaning pad or cleaning cloth together with instructions for use comprising instructions for cleaning a hard, preferably inanimate surface by attaching the cleaning pad or cleaning cloth to a handle to form a cleaning implement and contacting or wiping the hard surface with the cleaning implement.

Of the accompanying drawings illustrating the cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth of the present invention, Figure 2 shows a perspective view of a cleaning pad 200 having a freely movable, looped functional cuff 207. The looped functional cuff 207 has two surfaces 209 and 211. During a typical cleaning process, such as mopping or wiping, the cleaning pad 200 is moved forward in the Yf direction and then backward in the Yb direction over the surface to be cleaned. As the cleaning pad 200 is moved in the Yf direction, the functional cuff 207 folds over such that its surface 211 comes into contact with the surface to be cleaned. Particulate matter present on the surface to be cleaned is picked up by the surface 211 of the functional cuff 207. When the cleaning pad 200 is then moved in the Yb direction, the functional sleeve 207 folds over so that its other surface 209 comes into contact with the surface to be cleaned. The particulate material initially picked up by the surface 211 is trapped between the surface 211 of the functional sleeve 207 and the layer 201 of the cleaning pad 2000. The surface 209 of the functional sleeve 207 can then pick up additional particulate

TER MEER STEI[nTM"E1$t£*R &'PARTNER GbR -102-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

material. The cleaning pad further includes a scrubbing layer 201, a securing layer 203, and an absorbent layer 205 disposed between the scrubbing layer and the securing layer. Alternatively, layers 201, 203, and 205 may constitute a single absorbent layer. For simplicity, cleaning pad 200 is not shown as having multiple widths in the Z dimension. As noted above, although Figure 2 depicts each of layers 201, 203, and 205 as separate layers of material, one or more of these layers may be in the form of a laminate of two or more plies. In a preferred embodiment, scrubbing layer 201 is an apertured formed film, preferably a macroscopically stretched, three-dimensional plastic web. Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 2, materials which do not disrupt fluid flow may be disposed between the scrubbing layer 201 and the absorbent layer 203 and/or between the absorbent layer 203 and the attachment layer 205. However, it is essential that the scrubbing layer and the absorbent layer be in substantial fluid contact to ensure the required absorbent capacity of the cleaning pad. Although Figure 2 illustrates the pad 200 with all layers of the pad being the same size in the X and Y dimensions, it is preferred that the scrubbing layer 201 and the attachment layer 205 be larger than the absorbent layer so that the layers 201 and 205 can be bonded together around the periphery of the pad to provide integrity. The scrub layer and the attachment layer may be bonded to the absorbent layer or to each other using a variety of bonding means, including the use of a uniform continuous adhesive layer, a patterned adhesive layer, or any arrangement of adhesive in the form of discrete lines, spirals, or patches. Alternatively, bonding may be accomplished by heat bonding, pressure bonding, ultrasonic bonding, dynamic mechanical bonds, or any other bonding means or combinations of these bonding means known to those skilled in the art. Bonding may be around the periphery of the cleaning pad and/or across the surface of the cleaning pad so as to form a pattern on the surface of the scrub layer 201.

Fig. 3 shows an exploded view of the absorption layer 305

I f

TER MEER STEINTvTETSTER X'pa'rTNER GbR - 103 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANYCase: 7368/DE-UM21.01.2003

an embodiment of a cleaning pad according to the invention. The scrubbing layer of the cleaning pad and the optional attachment layer are not shown in Figure 3. The absorbent layer 305 in this embodiment is shown as being of a three-layer structure. In particular, the absorbent layer 305 is shown as being comprised of a discrete layer of a particulate superabsorbent gelling material 307 sandwiched between two discrete layers 306 and 308 of a fibrous material. In this embodiment, since the region 307 is present with a high concentration of the superabsorbent gelling material, it is preferred that the superabsorbent material not cause gel blocking as described above. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the fibrous layers 306 and 308 are each thermally bonded fibrous substrates, while the lower fibrous layer 308 is in direct fluid communication with the scrubbing layer (not shown). (Layer 307 may alternatively be a blend of fibrous material and superabsorbent material, with the superabsorbent material preferably present in a relatively high weight percentage of the layer.) Although the layers are shown as being equal in width, in a preferred embodiment, layer 306 is wider than layer 307 and layer 307 is wider than layer 308. When a scrub layer and a fastening layer are disposed, such a combination results in a pad of varied width in the Z dimension.

Fig. 4a shows a top view of a preferred cleaning pad 400 with the liquid-permeable scrubbing layer facing the viewer. Fig. 4b shows a sectional view (along the Y-Z plane) of the cleaning pad 400. As can be seen from Figs. 4a and 4b, the cleaning pad 400 has two freely movable, loop-shaped functional cuffs 411 and 413.

As can be seen particularly from Fig. 4b, the cleaning pad 400 has a scrubbing layer 401, a fastening layer 403, an absorption layer generally referred to as 404 between the scrubbing layer and the fastening layer, two freely movable, loop-shaped functional cuffs 411 and 413 and an adhesive scrubbing strip 430. The absorption layer 404 consists of three discrete layers 405, 407 and

409. Layer 409 is wider than layer 407, which in turn is wider than layer 405. This decreasing width leads to the functional

TER MEER STEINTCfEf^TE'R &*VaRTNER GbR - iO4 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Cuffs 411 and 413 provide improved functionality. During a typical cleaning operation, the cleaning pad 400 is moved in the Yf direction over a hard surface and the functional cuffs 411 and 413 are folded over such that the surfaces 417 and 425 come into contact with the surface to be cleaned and are capable of picking up particulate material. The cleaning pad 400 is then moved in the Yb direction over the hard surface, resulting in the functional cuffs 411 and 413 folding over such that the surfaces 419 and 423 come into contact with the surface to be cleaned. The particulate material picked up by the surface 425 is trapped between the surface 425 and the scrubbing layer 401. The surfaces 419 and 423 are then capable of picking up additional particulate material from the surface to be cleaned. As the cleaning pad 400 is moved back over the hard surface in the Yf direction, the additional picked up particulate material becomes trapped between the surface 423 and the scrubbing layer 401.

Figure 4a illustrates the general texture pattern formed by the materials 417 and 419 forming the functional sleeves 411 and 413 and the adhesive scrub strip 430. The functional sleeves 411 and 413 are both folded toward the centerline of the cleaning pad, which is preferred for packaging the cleaning pad 400 for sale. Also shown in Figure 4a is a scrub layer 401 comprising an apertured film having apertures 421 that are preferably tapered or tunnel-shaped. Also shown in Figure 4a is an area 410 corresponding to the periphery of the pad 400 wherein the scrub layer 401 and the attachment layer 403 are bonded by any suitable method. In a preferred embodiment, the bonding is by heat sealing.

According to a preferred embodiment, layers 405 and 407 of absorbent layer 404 comprise a high concentration of superabsorbent material, while layer 409 contains little or no superabsorbent material. In such embodiments, one or both layers 405 and 407 may comprise a homogeneous mixture of superabsorbent material and fibrous material. Alternatively, one or both layers may be constructed of discrete layers, for example, two fibrous layers forming a substantially continuous layer of

&Pgr;&Igr;

:1 .&Pgr;&Igr;?&Uacgr;.1

TER MEER ST INAUGURATION R cTpARTNER GbR - iO5 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

surrounded by superabsorbent particles.

Although not necessary, applicants have found that when superabsorbent particles are incorporated into the pad, it may be desirable to reduce or eliminate the superabsorbent particle content at the extreme leading and trailing edges of the pad. This is accomplished in pad 400 by forming absorbent layer 409 without superabsorbent material.

A preferred cleaning pad is shown in Figure 4b, which comprises two functional cuffs, an adhesive scrubbing strip, a liquid permeable scrubbing layer comprising an apertured film, three absorbent layers and an attachment layer.

J. Process for the manufacture of cleaning pads and/or wipes

The various layers and/or elements of the present cleaning pad are bonded together to form a unitary structure. The various layers and/or elements may be bonded together in a variety of ways, including, but not limited to, adhesive bonding, thermal bonding, ultrasonic bonding, and the like. The various layers and/or elements may be assembled into a cleaning pad either by hand using a conventional assembly line process.

When the layers and/or elements are bonded together, the adhesive is typically selected such that the bond formed by the adhesive is capable of maintaining its strength in wet environments, for example when the cleaning pad is saturated with fluid and/or dirt. The selection of the adhesive is particularly important when bonding two absorbent layers, when bonding an absorbent layer to a fastening layer, or when bonding an absorbent layer to a liquid-permeable scrubbing layer. In this context, the adhesive is typically selected such that the adhesive provides a bond with high water resistance, i.e. with a bond retention that corresponds to at least about 30%, preferably at least about 50%, and more preferably at least about 70% of the strength value of the dry bond. Both strength values can be measured according to a partially modified standard measurement.

TER MEER STEINlvfEfS'TER cCPARTNER GbR - 106-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

method ASTM D 1876-95 (1995) (T-Peel Test), which is more particularly described in U.S. Patent No. 5,969,025, issued to Corzani on October 19, 1999, which patent is hereby incorporated by reference.

The adhesives to be used in the present invention include vinylic emulsions, including those based on vinyl acetate or other vinyl esters, and ranging from homopolymers to copolymers with ethylene and/or acrylic monomers (vinyl acrylic resins); acrylic emulsions which are either homopolymers or copolymers; crosslinked adhesives, including those obtained by using a reactive comonomer (for example a monomer having functional carboxy, hydroxy, epoxy, amide, isocyanate groups or the like) which is capable of crosslinking as such (for example through carboxy groups reacting with hydroxy, epoxy or isocyanate groups) or by reaction with an external crosslinker (for example urea-formaldehyde resin, isocyanates, polyols, epoxides, amines and metal salts, especially zinc). The adhesives may also contain small amounts of tackifying resins to improve adhesion, for example, hydrogenated rosin esters added to a vinyl acetate/ethylene copolymer latex as a tackifier. Other suitable water-based adhesive compositions include those described in U.S. Patent 5,969,025, issued to Corzani on October 19, 1999, which is incorporated herein by reference.

iv. Pre-moistened cleaning wipe

The hard surface cleaning compositions described herein can be used in a pre-moistened wipe which can be used to wipe surfaces either alone or in combination with a handle to form a cleaning implement as described below. The wipe substrate can be constructed from suitable unmodified and/or modified naturally occurring fibers including cotton, esparto grass, bagasse, hemp, flax, silk, wool, wood pulp, chemically modified wood pulp, jute, ethyl cellulose and/or cellulose acetate. Suitable synthetic fibers can be fibers made from one or more of polyvinyl chloride, polyvinyl fluoride, polytetrafluoroethylene, polyvinylidene chloride, polyacrylic fibers such as ORLON®, poly-

·

·

TER MEER STEINlifEf&TER ^PARTNER GbR - iO7 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

lyvinyl acetate, Rayon®, polyethylene vinyl acetate, insoluble or soluble polyvinyl alcohol, polyolefins such as polyethylene (e.g. PULPEX®) and polypropylene, polyamides such as nylon, polyesters such as DACRON® or KODEL®, polyurethanes, polystyrenes and the like, including fibers comprising polymers containing more than one monomer. The absorbent layer may comprise exclusively naturally occurring fibers, exclusively synthetic fibers, or any suitable combination of naturally occurring and synthetic fibers.

The fibers useful herein may be hydrophilic, hydrophobic, or a combination of both hydrophilic and hydrophobic fibers. As indicated above, the particular choice of hydrophilic or hydrophobic fibers will depend on the other materials included in the absorbent layer (and to some extent) in the scrubbing layer as described below. Suitable hydrophilic fibers to be used in the present invention include cellulosic fibers, modified cellulosic fibers, rayon fibers, cotton fibers, polyester fibers such as hydrophilic nylon (HYDROFIL®). Suitable hydrophilic fibers may also be obtained by hydrophilizing hydrophobic fibers, for example with surfactants or silica-treated thermoplastic fibers derived from, for example, polyolefins such as polyethylene or polypropylene, polyacrylic resins, polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes, and the like.

Suitable wood pulp fibers can be obtained by the well-known chemical processes such as the kraft and sulphite processes. It is particularly preferred to derive these wood pulp fibers from Southern softwood because of their excellent absorption properties. These pulp fibers can also be obtained by mechanical processes such as wood grinding pulp processes, mechanical refining pulp processes, thermo-mechanical, chemo-mechanical and chemo-thermo-mechanical pulp processes. Recycled or secondary wood pulp fibers such as bleached and unbleached wood pulp fibers can also be used.

Another type of hydrophilic fiber that can be used in the present invention is chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers. As used herein, the term "chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers" refers to cellulosic fibers that have been stiffened by chemical means to increase the stiffness of the fibers under both dry and aqueous conditions.

TER MEER STEINM'EI'STER cCpARTNER GbR - go -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Such means include the use of a chemical stiffening agent which, for example, coats and/or impregnates the fibers. Such means may also include stiffening the fibers by altering the chemical structure, for example by cross-linking the polymer chains.

When fibers are used as (or form a structural component of) the absorbent layer, the fibers may optionally be combined with a thermoplastic material. Upon melting, at least a portion of this thermoplastic material migrates to the crossover points of the fibers, typically as a result of interfiber capillary gradients. These crossover points then become bonding sites for the thermoplastic material. Upon cooling, the thermoplastic materials solidify at these crossover points to form the bonding sites that hold together the matrix or web of fibers in each of the respective layers. This may be beneficial in providing overall integrity to the cleaning wipe.

Among various other effects, bonding at the fiber crossovers increases the overall compressive modulus and strength of the resulting thermally bonded device. In the case of chemically stiffened cellulosic fibers, the fusing and migration of the thermoplastic material also has the effect of increasing the average pore size of the resulting web while maintaining the density and basis weight of the originally formed web. This can improve the fluid absorption properties of the thermally bonded web upon contact with fluids as a result of improved fluid permeability and upon subsequent processing as a result of the combined ability of the stiffened fibers to maintain their stiffness upon wetting and the ability of the thermoplastic material to remain bonded at the fiber crossovers even upon wetting and also upon application of pressure under humid conditions. Overall, the thermally bonded webs made of stiffened fibers retain their original total volume, freeing up the volume regions previously occupied by the thermoplastic material and thus increasing the average interfiber capillary pore size.

Thermoplastic materials suitable for use in the invention may be in any of a variety of forms, including particles, fibers or

: ·&iacgr;

5 * ^: · ⁵

TEfS

TER MEER STEIN NlCTEfSTER cTpARTNER GbR - 1&Ogr;9 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Combinations of particles and fibers. Thermoplastic fibers are particularly preferred because of their ability to form a plurality of interfiber bonding sites. Suitable thermoplastic materials can be formed from any thermoplastic polymer which can be melted at temperatures which do not unduly damage the fibers forming the primary web or matrix of each layer. Preferably, the melting point of this thermoplastic material is below about 190 ^° C, and preferably between about 75°C and about 175 ^° C. In any event, the melting point of this thermoplastic material should be no lower than the temperature at which the thermally bonded absorbent structures, when used in cleaning pads, are typically stored. The melting point of the thermoplastic material is therefore typically not below about 50 ^° C.

The thermoplastic materials, and particularly the thermoplastic fibers, can be made from a variety of thermoplastic polymers including polyolefins such as polyethylene (e.g. PULPEX®) and polypropylene, polyesters, copolyesters, polyvinyl acetate, polyethylvinyl acetate, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polyacrylic resins, polyamides, copolyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and copolymers of the above materials such as vinyl chloride/vinyl acetate and the like. Depending on the desired properties of the thermally bonded absorbent device, suitable thermoplastic materials include hydrophilic fibers which have been rendered hydrophilic, for example with surfactants or silica-treated thermoplastic fibers derived from, for example, polyolefins such as polyethylene or polypropylene, polyacrylic resins, polyamides, polystyrenes, polyurethanes and the like. The surface of the hydrophobic thermoplastic fibers can be made hydrophilic by treating them with a surfactant, such as a nonionic or anionic surfactant, for example by spraying the fiber with a surfactant, by dipping the fibers in a surfactant, or by incorporating the surfactant as part of the polymer melt during manufacture of the thermoplastic fiber. Upon melting and resolidification, the surfactant tends to remain on the surface of the thermoplastic fiber. Suitable surfactants include nonionic surfactants such as Brij® 76, manufactured

TER MEER STEI N ⁵ M ¹ E IST E*R cTpa'rTNER GbR - no -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

manufactures various surfactants sold under the trademark Pegosperse® by ICI Americas, Inc., Wilmington, Delaware, and various surfactants sold under the trademark Pegosperse® by Glyco Chemical, Inc., Greenwich, Connecticut. In addition to nonionic surfactants, anionic surfactants may also be used. These surfactants may be applied to the thermoplastic fibers in amounts of, for example, about 0.2 to about 1 g per square centimeter of the thermoplastic fiber.

Suitable thermoplastic fibers can be made from a single polymer (monocomponent fibers) or more than one polymer (e.g. bicomponent fibers). As used herein, the term "bicomponent fibers" refers to thermoplastic fibers that comprise a core fiber of one polymer covered by a thermoplastic sheath of a different polymer. The polymer forming the sheath often melts at a different and typically lower temperature than the polymer forming the core. As a result, these bicomponent fibers allow thermal bonding by melting the sheath polymer while maintaining the desired strength properties of the core polymer.

Bicomponent fibers suitable for use in the present invention may include sheath/core fibers having the following polymer combinations: polyethylene/polypropylene, polyethylvinylacetate/polypropylene, polyethylene/polyester, polypropylene/polyester, copolyester/polyester, and the like. Thermoplastic bicomponent fibers particularly suitable for use in the present invention are those having a core of polypropylene or polyester and a sheath of a lower melting copolyester, polyethylvinylacetate or polyethylene (such as those available from Danaklon a/s, Chisso Corp., and under the designation CELBOND® from Hercules). These bicomponent fibers may be concentric or eccentric. As used herein, the terms "concentric" and "eccentric" refer to whether the sheath is of uniform or non-uniform thickness across the cross-sectional area of the bicomponent fibers. Eccentric bicomponent fibers may be desirable because they allow for higher compressive strength at lower fiber thicknesses.

Processes for producing thermally bonded fiber materials are described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/479,096 (filed July 3, 1995 by Richards et al.) (see especially pages 16-20) and ...

TER MEER STEIN ¹ IVIEfST^ cf PARTNER GbR - in -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

tent 5,549,589, issued August 27, 1996 to Horney et al. (see particularly columns 9 to 10). The disclosures of these documents are hereby incorporated by reference.

The absorbent layer may also comprise a HIPE-derived hydrophilic polymer foam. Such foams and methods of making them are described in U.S. Patent 5,550,167, issued August 27, 1996 to DesMarais; and commonly assigned U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 08/370,695, filed January 10, 1995 by Stone et al. (which references are incorporated herein by reference).

The wipe may be comprised of one or more layers including an abrasive layer to achieve maximum cleaning effectiveness. For pre-moistened wipes having a single substrate, the substrate is preferably comprised of fibers comprising some combination of hydrophilic and hydrophobic fibers, and more preferably a composition comprising at least about 30% hydrophobic fibers, and even more preferably at least about 50% hydrophobic fibers in a hydro-crosslinked web. Hydrophobic fibers include polyester fibers as well as fibers derived from polyolefins such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and the like. The combination of hydrophobic and absorbent hydrophilic fibers is a particularly preferred embodiment for the single-ply pre-moistened wipe because the absorbent component, which is typically cellulose, assists in the capture and removal of dust and other soiling materials present on the surface. The hydrophobic fibers are particularly useful for cleaning greasy soils by improving the pre-moistened wipe and by reducing the friction between the substrate and the hard surface (slip behavior). In terms of an order of chemical compositions of the fibers with improved slip behavior, the inventors have found that polyester, particularly polyester together with polypropylene, is most effective in achieving excellent slip behavior, followed by polyethylene. Pre-moistened wipes based on cellulose (or rayon), despite the fact that they are highly absorbent, result in significant friction between the substrate and the surface to be cleaned. Fiber blends are more difficult to classify in terms of their slip behavior, although the inventors have found that even low levels of polyester or polypropylene have a significant

TER MEER STEINTvVETSTE*R cTpa'rTNER GbR -112-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Improved slip performance in virtually all cases. Fiber compositions, which typically exhibit a coefficient of friction with glass, can be improved if necessary by impregnating or chemically bonding the wipe with low levels of silicone or other chemicals known to reduce friction. Silicones are preferred because they also reduce the foaming of the composition, thereby providing improved results.

Various manufacturing methods can be used to form a suitable nonwoven web. For example, the web can be made by dry web forming methods such as air laying, or alternatively by wet laying such as on a paper machine. Other methods of making the nonwoven materials including, but not limited to, melt spinning, spunbonding, needle punching and water jet entangling methods can also be used.

According to one embodiment, the dry nonwoven web may be an airlaid web comprising a combination of natural fibers, staple length synthetic fibers, and a latex binder. The dry nonwoven web may comprise about 20-80 wt.% wood pulp fibers, 10-60 wt.% staple length polyester fibers, and about 10-25 wt.% binder.

The dry nonwoven fabric may have a basis weight of between about 30 and about 100 grams per square meter. The density of the dry nonwoven fabric may be measured by evaporating the liquid from the pre-moistened wipe, and the density may be less than about 0.15 grams per ^cubic centimeter. The density is the basis weight of the dry nonwoven fabric divided by the thickness of the dry nonwoven fabric, measured in equal units, and the thickness of the dry nonwoven fabric is measured using a circular loading pad having an area of about 2 square inches, which provides a compression pressure of about 95 grams per square inch. In one embodiment, the dry nonwoven fabric may have a basis weight of about 64 grams per ^square meter, a thickness of about 0.06 centimeters, and a density of about 0.11 grams per ^cubic centimeter.

In one embodiment, the dry nonwoven fabric may contain at least 50% by weight wood pulp fibers, and more preferably at least about 70% by weight wood pulp fibers. A particular airlaid nonwoven fabric useful in the present invention comprises about 73.5% by weight cellulosic fibers (Southern

TER MEER STEIN ¹ METST Eft cV'PARTNER GbR - us -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Softwood Kraft fibers having an average fiber length of about 2.6 mm); about 10.5 weight percent polyester fibers having a denier of about 1.35 g/9000 meters of fiber length and a staple fiber length of about 0.85 inch; and about 16 weight percent of a binder composition comprising a styrene/butadiene copolymer. The binder composition can be prepared using a latex adhesive commercially available as Rovene 5550 (49 weight percent styrene/butadiene) from Mallard Creek Polymers, Charlotte, N.C.

An airlaid nonwoven fabric according to the invention is the airlaid nonwoven fabric used in the PAMPERS BABY FRESH baby diaper product manufactured by Procter & Gamble Co., Cincinnati, Ohio.

The following patents are referenced for their disclosures relating to nonwovens: U.S. Patent 3,862,472, issued January 28, 1975; U.S. Patent 3,982,302, issued September 28, 1976; U.S. Patent 4,004,323, issued December 25, 1977;

Jan. 1977; U.S. Patent 4,057,669, issued Nov. 8, 1977; U.S. Patent 4,097,965, issued Jul. 4, 1978; U.S. Patent 4,176,427, issued Dec. 4, 1979; U.S. Patent 4,130,915, issued Dec. 26, 1978; U.S. Patent 4,135,024, issued Jan. 16, 1979; U.S. Patent 4,189,896, issued Feb. 26, 1980; U.S. Patent 4,207,367, issued Jun. 10, 1980; U.S. Patent 4,296,161, issued Oct. 20.

1981; U.S. Patent 4,309,469, issued Jan. 25, 1982; U.S. Patent 4,682,942, issued July 28, 1987; and U.S. Patents 4,637,859; 5,223,096; 5,240,562; 5,556,509; and 5,580,423.

The prior art also discloses dust cloths such as those described in U.S. Patent 3,629,047, U.S. Patent 3,494,421, U.S. Patent 4,144,370, U.S. Patent 4,808,467, U.S. Patent 5,144,729 and U.S. Patent 5,525,397, which patents are incorporated herein by reference, as being effective for picking up and retaining particulate dirt. Such cloths must have a structure which is reinforced yet has free fibers to be effective. Applicants have found that similar structures used in a dry state for dusting can also be used with advantage when pre-moistened with a liquid in amounts of about 0.5 g of chemical solution per g of dry substrate or more. These amounts are significantly higher than the amounts used for chemical additives such as mineral oils, waxes, etc., which are usually applied to conventional dust cloths to improve their performance. In particular, the inventive

TER MEER STEINTviEf^TE'R &"PARTNER GbR - H4-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

These wipes are particularly designed to be used pre-moistened with aqueous compositions.

In a preferred embodiment, the cleaning sheet has at least two regions that differ in basis weight. The measurement of basis weight is described in U.S. Provisional Patent Applications 60/055,330 and 60/047,619. Briefly, the measurement is made photographically by distinguishing the dark (low basis weight) and light (high basis weight) regions of the network. In particular, the cleaning sheet comprises one or more low basis weight regions, the low basis weight region(s) having a basis weight that is no more than about 80% of the basis weight of the high basis weight regions. In a preferred embodiment, the first region has a relatively high basis weight and comprises a substantially continuous network. The second region comprises a plurality of mutually discrete relatively low basis weight regions surrounded by the first high basis weight region. In particular, a preferred cleaning wipe comprises a continuous region having a basis weight of from about 30 to about 120 grams per square meter and a plurality of discontinuous regions surrounded by the high basis weight region, the discontinuous regions being randomly arranged in a repeating pattern and having a basis weight that is no more than about 80% of the basis weight of the continuous region.

In one embodiment, in addition to areas that differ in basis weight, the cleaning wipe also has a substantial macroscopic three-dimensional configuration. The term "macroscopic three-dimensional configuration" as used herein to describe three-dimensional cleaning wipes means that a three-dimensional pattern is readily apparent to the naked eye when the perpendicular distance between the observer's eye and the plane of the wipe is about 30.5 cm (12 inches). In other words, the three-dimensional structures of the premoistened wipes of the present invention are cleaning wipes that are non-planar in that one or both surfaces of the wipes exist in multiple planes. In contrast, the term "planar" refers to wipes having surface irregularities on one or both

t ·

TER MEER STEIN^tfMTE'R & "PARTNER GbR - iis-

the Procter & gamble company Case: 7368/DE-UM January 21, 2003

both surfaces on a small scale, the surface irregularities not being readily visible to the naked eye when the perpendicular distance between the observer's eye and the plane of the cloth is about 30.5 cm (12 inches). In other words, the observer on a macro scale will not notice that one or both surfaces of the cloth are in different planes in a manner that gives rise to three-dimensionality. The measurement of three-dimensionality is described by Fereshtehkhou et al. in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/082,349, filed May 20, 1998 (Case 6664M); Fereshtehkhou et al., U.S. Serial No. 09/082,396, filed

May 20, 1998 (Case 6798M), the applications of which are hereby incorporated by reference. Briefly, macroscopic three-dimensionality is described as the average height difference, which is defined as the average distance between adjacent peaks and valleys of a given surface of a wipe, as well as the average peak-to-peak distance, which is the average distance between adjacent peaks of a given surface. Macroscopic three-dimensionality is also described as the surface topography index of the outer surface of a cleaning wipe, where the surface topography index is the ratio obtained by dividing the average height difference of a surface by the average pitch of the peaks of that surface. In accordance with a preferred embodiment, a macroscopic three-dimensional cleaning wipe has a first outer surface and a second outer surface, at least one of the outer surfaces having a peak-to-peak distance of at least about 1 mm and a surface topography index of from about 0.01 mm to about 10 mm. The macroscopic three-dimensional structures of the pre-moistened wipes according to the invention optionally comprise a reinforcing material which, after heating and cooling, contracts to form an additional macroscopic three-dimensional structure.

According to a further alternative embodiment, the substrate may comprise a composite material of two outer nonwovens which are entangled under the action of water, such as nonwovens made of polyester fibers, rayon fibers or mixtures thereof with a basis weight of about 10 to about 60 g per square meter, which are connected to an inner retaining layer which is in the form of a net-like reinforcing material which, when

TER MEER STEI NXfEf^T E*R & "PARTNER GbR -lie-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

heat and gives the outer layers a surface texture.

The pre-moistened wipe is obtained by wetting the dry substrate with at least about 1.0 g of a liquid composition per gram of dry nonwoven fabric. Preferably, the dry substrate is wetted with at least about 1.5, and more preferably at least about 2.0 g of the liquid composition per gram of dry nonwoven fabric. The exact amount of solution impregnated into the wipe will depend on the intended use of the product. Pre-moistened wipes used for cleaning counters, stove tops, glass, etc. have optimal wetnesses of about 1 g of solution to about 5 g of solution per gram of wipe. For wipes used for cleaning floors, the pre-moistened substrate preferably may include an absorbent core reservoir having a large capacity for absorbing and retaining fluids. Preferably, the absorbent reservoir has a fluid capacity of about 5 g to about 15 g per gram of absorbent material. Pre-moistened wipes used for cleaning walls, external surfaces and the like have a capacity of about 2 g to about 10 g per dry fleece.

A. Pre-moistened cleaning wipes for floors, counters and/or

The hard surface cleaning compositions described above can be used in a pre-moistened wipe for general cleaning purposes for counters, walls and floors. The materials and methods described can also be used for applications on floors, counters, walls and floors, so reference should be made thereto. It is particularly advantageous in the context of wipes for floors that these have three-dimensional structures. It has been shown that the three-dimensional structure of the substrates described above enables improved hair absorption compared to flat wipes, which is surprising in the area of wet surfaces. According to a preferred embodiment, the user advantageously uses slightly undulating movements in an upward-downward wiping pattern in order to maximize hair absorption. Particularly preferred three-dimensional

TER MEER STEINTvIePSTE'r cTpARTNER GbR - 117-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

dimensional cleaning wipes are described in more detail in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/082,396, filed May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkhou et al. (Case 6798M), which application is hereby incorporated by reference.

The optimum moisture ranges from about 1 g of solution to about 5 g of solution per gram of wipe. In the context of wipes for cleaning floors, the pre-moistened substrate may optionally include an absorbent core reservoir having a large capacity for absorbing and retaining fluids. Preferably, the absorbent reservoir has a fluid capacity of about 5 g to about 15 g per gram of absorbent material. Pre-moistened wipes intended for cleaning walls, external surfaces, etc. have a capacity of about 2 g to about 10 g of the dry fiber web.

Since no cleaning step is performed in the application of a general purpose pre-moistened wipe, it is essential that the content of non-volatile materials be kept to a minimum to avoid filmy or streaky residues of the product. Accordingly, the active ingredients used herein, such as surfactants, which are incorporated into the hard surface cleaning compositions are preferably used in even lower amounts to achieve the best end results. It has further been found that compositions consisting of predominantly organic hydrophobic cleaning solvents can provide an excellent end result along with good cleaning in a general purpose pre-moistened wipe similar to that described for the pre-moistened glass wipes. Advantageously, buffers having molecular weights of less than about 150 g/mole can be used to improve cleaning without compromising the end result. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanolamine, ethanolamine, 2-amino-2-methyl-l-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol, acetic acid, glycolic acid, and the like. Most preferred of these are ammonia, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-2-propanol, and acetic acid. When these buffers are employed, they are present in amounts of from about 0.005% to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more preferred for the more volatile chemicals. As in the case of the glass wipes, the inventors have found that simple compositions combining low levels of non-volatile surfactant with preferably high levels of

: 5 :V

TER MEER STEIISfMEfSTE ^# R cTPARTNER GbR - us-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

the preferred organic cleaning solvent, is sufficient to provide excellent cleaning and wetting performance even in the absence of the hydrophilic polymer. However, the addition of polymer can be used to advantage to provide other benefits such as anti-staining, anti-hazing, and easier subsequent cleaning.

For added convenience, the pre-moistened general purpose wipes may be attached to a mop head with a handle, an example of which is shown in Figures 5, 7, 7a and 8, discussed below. In such an embodiment, the pre-moistened wipe is ideal for light cleaning and disinfecting. Since the amount of solution released from the wipe is less than that released during conventional cleaning, very effective antimicrobial systems must be used. In such a composition, the pre-moistened general purpose and floor wipe may contain a solution containing an effective amount of a surfactant and citric acid in an amount of from about 0.5% to about 5%. To increase the effectiveness of such a solution, hydrogen peroxide or a source of hydrogen peroxide may be added in amounts of from about 0.5% to about 3%. An alternative composition should contain quaternary ammonium salts such as dioctyldimethylammonium chloride, didecyldimethylammonium chloride, C12, C14 and Cie dimethylbenzylammonium chloride in amounts greater than about 0.05%. Such compounds have often been found to detract from the benefits of the preferred polymers. Although these solutions (for example, those comprising sources of hydrogen peroxide, quaternary ammonium compounds and citric acid) provide high levels of antimicrobial effectiveness, they leave a filmy surface because they are solids and must be used in high amounts.

Better end results are achieved by using compositions containing predominantly the organic cleaning solvents described above in amounts of from about 0.25% to about 10%, more preferably from about 0.5% to about 5%, in combination with the non-volatile buffers described above to effect cleaning and wetting. Small amounts of non-volatile ingredients, including hydrophilic polymers, may advantageously be incorporated so that the total content of non-volatile materials excluding fragrances and antimicrobials is from about 0% to about 0.08%, more preferably from about 0% to about 0.055%, most preferably about 0%.

£"PARTNER GbR - 119 -

TER MEER STEINWrEl ¹ SI ^- EW £"PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

to about 0.025%. In a preferred embodiment, the combination of surfactants, wetting polymers, buffers and hydrophobic organic cleaning solvents is selected to provide a reduction in the surface tension of water (72 dynes/cm) of greater than about 25 dynes/cm, more preferably greater than 30 dynes/cm, and even more preferably greater than 35 dynes/cm. Optionally, small amounts of more effective antimicrobial ingredients such as bronopol, hexitidine, sold by Angus Chemical (211 Sanders Road, Northbrook, Illinois, USA), Kathon®, 2-(hydroxymethyl)-(amino)-ethanol, propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethylaminoacetate, formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, quaternary ammonium salts such as dioctyldimethylammonium chloride, didecyldimethylammonium chloride, C12-, C14- and Ci6-dimethylbenzyl (Bardac® 2280 and Barquat® MB-80, sold by Lonza), dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-triazinetrione and more preferably l,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one, sold by Avicia Chemicals, chlorhexidine diacetate, sold by Aldrich-Sigma, sodium pyrithione and polyhexamethylene biguanide in amounts of about 0.001% to about 0.1%, more preferably about 0.005% to about 0.05%, is added to maintain and/or provide the antimicrobial effects.

A significant advantage of the wet wipes of the present invention is that residual disinfection benefits are provided by careful selection of the antimicrobial agents in combination with the unnecessary rinsing and polishing steps of the present invention (users are in the habit of cleaning floors and counters to a wet finish). By residual disinfection is meant that the residual antimicrobial activity delivered by the wet wipe to the hard surface is at least about 99.9 % effective in killing bacteria and other microorganisms for a period of about 8 to about 72 hours, more preferably about 12 to about 48 hours, and even more preferably at least about 24 hours. While residual disinfection capability can be achieved using conventional means (i.e., applying a spray product with a paper towel, sponge, rag, etc.), the pre-moistened wipe has the additional advantage of providing cleaning and disinfection action in one package. The remaining effects result from a combination of the low

TER MEER STEIIweI'STE'r &*PARTNER GbR - 120 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

vapor pressure and the high biocidal efficacy of the antimicrobial agents contained in the compositions of the invention. Those skilled in the art will recognize that residual disinfection benefits, if achieved with compositions having a very low surfactant content, are even more readily achieved with compositions in which the surfactant content is increased. Residual disinfection power, combined with excellent end results, can convince consumers of the effectiveness of the wet wipe. Such a conviction is extremely important for tasks such as cleaning surfaces that are particularly susceptible to the nesting of germs, particularly countertops, stove tops, faucets, sinks, furniture, showers, glass and other fixtures located near or in the kitchen or bathroom(s).

Preferred antimicrobial agents that can provide residual benefits using a wet wipe or a dry wipe that becomes moist by contact with a wet composition during the cleaning process include Kathon®, 2-(hydroxymethyl)-(amino)-ethanol, propylene glycol, sodium hydroxymethylaminoacetate. Formaldehyde and glutaraldehyde, quaternary ammonium salts such as dioctyldimethylammonium chloride, octyldecyldimethylammonium chloride, didecyldimethylammonium chloride, C12-, C14- and C16-dimethylbenzyl (Bardac® 2280 and Barquat® MB-80, sold by Lonza), dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-triazinetrione and more preferably tetrakis(hydroxymethyl)phosphonium sulfate (THPS), l,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one, sold by Avicia Chemicals, chlorhexidine diacetate, sold by Aldrich-Sigma, sodium pyrithione and polyhexamethylene biguanide, these products being used in amounts of about 0.001% to about 0.1%, more preferably about 0.005% to about 0.05%. The specific antimicrobial agents and combinations thereof would be selected by the formulator to be effective against specific bacteria. Preferably, the antimicrobial agents are selected to be effective against gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria, enveloped and non-enveloped viruses and fungi normally present in consumer homes, hotels, restaurants, commercial establishments and hospitals. Most preferably, the antimicrobial agents provide residual disinfection activity against Salmonella choleraesuis, Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Staphylococcus aureus

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 121 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

and Escherichia coli and combinations thereof. Whenever possible, the antimicrobial agents are selected to provide residual disinfection benefits against more than one bacterial organism, and more preferably against at least one gram-negative organism and at least one gram-positive organism.

The inventors have found that residual disinfection capability can also be achieved or increased by adjusting the pH. Furthermore, the use of surfactants at low levels to reduce surface tension by more than about 25 dynes/cm, preferably more than about 30 dynes/cm, can be advantageously used in a pre-moistened wipe in combination with pH effects. Compositions having a pH of 10.5 or more or a pH of 3 or less have been found to be suitable for providing the desired residual effectiveness. The preferred hydrophilic substantive polymer can be used to improve residual effectiveness, particularly for volatile actives such as acetic acid. The use of pH can also serve to reduce the level of the above actives required to achieve the desired residual effect. Preferred active ingredients that work by controlling pH include lactic acid, glycolic acid, Cs, Cg, Cio fatty acids, sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide.

Other suitable pre-moistened cleaning wipes that demonstrate antimicrobial efficacy and residual antimicrobial efficacy include those described in.

This approach, i.e., the use of a combination of hydrophobic organic solvent plus volatile buffer plus optionally low levels of non-volatile starting materials to achieve a superior end result, in combination with effective and low-streaking antimicrobial agents, can be applied to a variety of practical applications as described herein, including general cleaners, glass cleaners, glass cleaning wipes, and solutions used with disposable pads (either with or without a stem or handle to form a cleaning device, as will be described below).

The use of low levels of non-volatile components in the compositions according to the invention raises problems in

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -122-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Incorporation of the fragrances. Some methods for improving the solubility of fragrances are described below. However, in certain cases, particularly when hydrophobic fragrances are desired, incorporation of the fragrance or perfume can be problematic. To circumvent this problem, the inventors have advantageously found that fragrance delivery can be achieved by applying the concentrated fragrance directly to either the wipe (or pad). In this manner, virtually any fragrance can be used. To minimize any adverse effect from residues caused by the concentrated fragrance, the fragrance is preferably applied to the edge of the wipe or pad or to areas that do not directly contact the surface to be treated. In another embodiment, the fragrance can also be incorporated into the package containing the wipes. Similarly, the use of low levels of non-volatile actives makes it difficult to incorporate effective suds suppressors into the aqueous composition. It has been found that suds suppressors can be more easily and effectively applied directly to the wipe to ensure suds control. This has been found to not only overcome the problem of excessive sudsing perceived by the consumer, but also to provide an improved end result in drying the surface. It has further been found that applying a suds suppressor directly to the wipes makes the process significantly easier by providing better control of the suds during manufacture and packaging. Preferred suds suppressors are those which are effective at levels of no more than about 0.1 grams of suds suppressor per gram of substrate, more preferably at levels of less than about 0.01 grams of suds suppressor per gram of substrate, even more preferably less than about 0.005 grams of suds suppressor per gram of substrate. The preferred suds suppressor in this context is DC AG manufactured by the Dow Corning Company. The use of foam suppressors to improve surface appearance is particularly significant because these materials are effective at very low levels.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -123-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM . January 21, 2003

B. Pre-moistened glass cleaning cloth

Pre-moistened cleaning wipes for use on glass can be either single-layer or multi-layer. Since the surface is not wiped dry when a pre-moistened wipe is used, it is essential in single-layer wipes that the content of non-volatile materials is kept to a minimum. Accordingly, the active ingredients described above are preferably used in even lower amounts to achieve the best end results. It has further been found that compositions consisting solely of organic, hydrophobic cleaning solvents in a pre-moistened wipe give an excellent end result with good cleaning. These solvents have been found to give better and even more uniform surface wetting than the aqueous, hydrophilic solvents such as ethanol, isopropanol and the like. This is important because it results in more uniform drying, which signals to the consumer that streaks will not form. It is further believed, without being limited by theory, that in a dirty environment, the hydrophobic organic cleaning solvents dry with less streaking. For example, in the context of glass cloths, conventional single layer glass cloths such as Glassmates manufactured by Reckitt & Colman which employ only hydrophilic solvents (i.e., which do not contain a hydrophobic organic cleaning solvent) dry in spots. In the context of a pre-moistened wipe, the cleaning solvents are used in an amount of from about 0.5% to about 10%, more preferably from about 1% to about 5%. Preferred hydrophobic organic cleaning solvents include mono-propylene glycol propoyl ether, mono-propylene glycol butyl ether, mono-ethylene glycol butyl ether, and mixtures thereof. Other aqueous hydrophilic solvents such as ethanol, isopropanol, isobutanol, 2-butanol, methoxypropanol and the like may be used to enhance fragrance performance. Buffers having molecular weights of less than about 150 g/mole as described above may be advantageously used to enhance cleaning without affecting the final result. Examples of preferred buffers include ammonia, methanolamine, ethanolamine, 2-amino-2-methyl-l-propanol, 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -124-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

1-propanol, acetic acid, glycolic acid, and the like. Most preferred are 2-dimethylamino-2-methyl-1-propanol and acetic acid. If used, the buffers are present in amounts of from about 0.005% to about 0.5%, with the higher levels being more preferred for the more volatile chemicals. In the context of glass wipes, simple compositions with low levels of non-volatile surfactant and preferably high levels of the preferred organic cleaning solvent are sufficient to provide excellent cleaning and wetting performance even in the absence of the hydrophilic polymer. However, the addition of the polymer can be used to advantage to provide additional benefits such as anti-staining, anti-fogging, and easier subsequent cleaning.

Pre-moistened wipes are known from the state of the art.

For example, U.S. Patent No. 4,276,338 discloses a multilaminate absorbent article having adjacent first and second layers held together to enhance wicking. U.S. Patent No. 4,178,407 describes a single sheet with an absorbent surface on both sides and additionally having a liquid impermeable inner layer. The sheet is designed to have low wet strength, with the layer of absorbent material consisting of loose fibers. The prior art also describes pre-moistened wipes for glass cleaning purposes. U.S. Patent No. 4,448,704 describes an article suitable for cleaning hard surfaces such as glass. The article may be moist or in tear-open pouches. The article of U.S. Patent No. 4,448,704 is prewashed with demineralized water or with the solution used to impregnate the article, the liquid composition having a surface tension of less than 35 dynes/cm and preferably containing a surfactant and a partially esterified resin such as a partially esterified styrene/maleic anhydride copolymer. All patents are hereby incorporated by reference.

The pre-moistened wipes according to the invention are advantageously not pre-washed, although the inventors have found that they provide an excellent end result even as single-layer wipes. An additional advantage of the pre-moistened glass wipes is that they reduce the formation of lint.

TER MEER STEIMMe!sTER'& PARTNER GbR - 125-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ing to a minimum. Measures such as prewashing typically result in a loosening of the fibers, which makes the substrate more prone to pilling or fiber formation. In particular, in the context of water jet entangled structures, the strength of the fiber bond is optimally achieved during processing of the fiber materials and not during manufacture or preparation of the premoistened wipe. As a result, the preferred compositions of the invention exhibit less lint formation. In addition, the liquid composition used on the premoistened wipes is preferably substantially free of surfactants. In this connection, the surface tension of the liquid need not reduce the surface tension to below 35 dynes/cm. In the context of a multi-layer wipe according to the invention, it has two sides which differ in their function. One side is premoistened and serves to dispense the liquid, while the other is preferably not moistened and serves for polishing and final wiping.

In the context of glass cleaning and other cleaning operations where smaller amounts of liquid are necessary to reduce the amount of liquid remaining on the surfaces and to achieve grease cleaning effectiveness, a preferred embodiment includes a dry nonwoven substrate in which at least about 65% of the dry nonwoven is comprised of hydrophobic fibers such as polyester, polypropylene, polyethylene and the like and minor amounts of hydrophilic fibers such as wood pulp, cotton and the like in amounts of less than about 35%.

The low content of hydrophilic fibers results in a reduction in the amount of liquid that the wipe can retain, while higher content of hydrophobic fibers serves to better absorb grease. In addition to the benefits related to improved grease cleaning, the inventors have found that hydrophobic fibers also improve the handle of the wipe on glass and other hard surfaces, resulting in an easier cleaning feel for the consumer and the treated surface. This improvement in ease of cleaning, slip or "glide" can be quantified experimentally by friction measurements on relevant hard surfaces. Improved slip of the wipe allows additional freedom in the formulation of the liquid composition. Hydrophobic fibers provide benefits of slip and

·

TER MEER STEINM'EISTE*r'& PARTNER GbR - 126 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

depending on whether the wipe is fully pre-moistened or whether the wipe is fully dry. This is important because wipes become progressively dry with use. In this way, the content of surfactants with chain lengths of C14 or more, which are known to provide lubricity benefits, can be substantially reduced or preferably eliminated entirely from the liquid composition used in the pre-moistened wipe, while maintaining excellent lubricity (low friction) properties. The use of wipes having some content of hydrophobic fibers, particularly polyester, provides increased flexibility in the formulation of pre-moistened wipes for acidic pH glass. Acidic cleaning compositions have been shown to significantly affect the lubricity of cellulosic substrates such as conventional paper towels or pre-moistened cellulose wipes.

In addition to the application of material composition, the wiper dimension can also be used to control dosing as well as achieve ergonomic benefits. Preferred wiper dimensions range from about 14 cm (5 1/2 inches) to about 23 cm (9 inches) in length and from about 14 cm (5 1/2 inches) to about 23 cm (9 inches) in width to fit comfortably in one hand. As such, the wiper preferably has dimensions such that the length and width do not differ by more than about 5.1 cm (2 inches). In the context of cleaning heavier soils, the wipers are preferably larger so that they can be used and then folded either once or twice to contain the soil inside the fold and the wiper can be reused. For this application, the wiper has a length of approximately 14 cm (5 1/2 inches) to approximately 33 cm (13 inches) and a width of approximately 25.4 cm (10 inches) to approximately 33 cm (13 inches). As such, the wiper can be folded once or twice and still fit comfortably in the hand.

In addition to wipes made using a single layer substrate, in certain situations it is advantageous to form a pre-moistened wipe with multiple layers. According to a preferred embodiment, the wipe consists of a multi-layer structure with a pre-moistened outer layer, an impermeable film

TER MEER STEINMETSTER"& PARTNER GbR -127-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

lie or membrane as an inner layer and a second outer layer which is substantially dry. To improve the moisture capacity of the wipe and to protect the backing layer from becoming prematurely wet, an absorption reservoir may optionally be introduced between the pre-moistened first outer layer and the impermeable film or membrane. Preferably, the dimensions of the reservoir are smaller than the dimensions of the two outer layers to avoid liquid being drawn from the front layer to the backing layer by capillary action.

The use of a multilayer structure described herein can be highly desirable in that it enables a dry polishing operation which is essentially directed to removing the majority of the liquid remaining on the glass after application of the wet side of the pre-moistened wipe. The inventors have found that even during a polishing treatment, hydrophilic poisoner contained in the pre-moistened wipe remains on the glass and imparts anti-fogging properties to the glass. The polishing treatment also results in improved overall flexibility in the content of solids used in the liquid composition since the majority of the solids are wiped off along with the rest of the aqueous composition during the polishing treatment. Indeed, those skilled in the art will recognize that it may be advantageous to use very small amounts, preferably less than about 0.02%, of water-soluble but crystalline surfactants because of the increased tendency to dry the substrate to remove such crystalline solids from the glass surface.

The multi-layer structure is also beneficial in more heavily soiled environments such as those found on exterior windows or automotive windows. By applying a fresh, clean surface to polish, the multi-layer structure reduces the amount of dirty liquid being pushed around with the pre-moistened wipe.

When a multi-layer structure is used, it is preferred that the outer pre-moistened layer contains at least about 30% hydrophobic fibers for oil removal and to improve slip properties. The impermeable inner layer is preferably made of polyethylene, polypropylene or mixtures thereof. The mixture of the composition

ν1·Ggr;&iacgr;1·&idiagr;&Iacgr;3

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 128 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

and the thickness of the impermeable layer are selected to minimize, or preferably prevent, any leakage of liquid from the pre-moistened first outer layer to the dry second outer layer. Those skilled in the art will recognize that the use of a reservoir core or storage core or a pre-moistened outer layer having a high fluid capacity will stress the impermeable layer such that more than one impermeable layer may be required to ensure sufficient dryness of the second outer layer of the wiper. When present, the reservoir is preferably made of treated or untreated cellulose, either as a single material or as a hybrid material in combination with hydrophobic fibers. The hydrophobic constituent content of the reservoir layer is preferably less than about 30%, more preferably less than about 20% by weight of the total fiber content of the layer. In a preferred embodiment, the reservoir or storage layer is made of air-laid cellulose. The second outer layer, which is essentially dry for the stem, is preferably made of cellulose or mixtures of cellulose and synthetic fibers with high absorbency.

The inventors have recognized that packaging wipes having a pre-moistened side and a dry side can be difficult. To solve this packaging problem, a preferred folding scheme has been developed. The wipes are folded either in half or in thirds or in another suitable manner such that all of the pre-moistened sides of each of the wipes are folded inward and toward each other. As a result, none of the outer dry layers of wipes stacked on top of each other in a bag, container or box are in direct contact with any of the pre-moistened sides of the wipes. The term "direct contact" means that all of the pre-moistened sides of the wipes are separated from the dry sides by a liquid impermeable layer. Packaging the wipes in this preferred manner ensures that the dry sides of the wipes are not contaminated with the liquid during storage of the wipes in a container and prior to use. The packaging material may be any suitable material, including plastic or cellophane. If necessary, other options for additional

, . &igr;» · t ·· JJ

TER MEER STEIN*METsTEr'& PARTNER GbR - 129 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Additional prevention of potential absorption of the liquid into the polishing layer by simply arranging a superabsorbent polymer in the polishing layer or between the impermeable layer and the polishing layer.

In a preferred embodiment, a starter kit includes a rigid box or other container adapted to hold from about eight to about twenty-four wipes that have been folded at least once, and lower cost packages adapted to hold from about five to about twelve wipes that are used as refill packs.

Importantly, the pre-moistened wipe can be used by itself or in conjunction with an implement having a handle and means for securing the wipe. As used herein, the term implement means any physical means for securing a substrate such as a pad, a dry wipe, a pre-moistened wipe, and the like. Optionally, but preferably, the pre-moistened wipe comprises one or more preservatives to ensure fungistatic effects. Examples of preservatives to be used in combination with the premoistened wipes of the present invention include methylparaben, bronopol, hexitidine, dichloro-s-triazinetrione, trichloro-s-triazinetrione and quaternary ammonium salts including dioctyldimethylammonium chloride, didecyldimethylammonium chloride, C12, C14 and C16 dimethylbenzyl (Bardax® 2280 and Barquat® MB-80, sold by Lonza), and the like at concentrations of less than about 0.02%. Preferred preservatives include citric acid, tetrakis(hydroxymethyl)phosphonium sulfate (THPS), sodium pyrithione, Kathon® and 1,2-benzisothiazolin-3-one, sold by Avicia Chemicals. The preservatives, when employed, are used at concentrations of from about 0.001% to about 0.05%, more preferably from about 0.005% to about 0.02%. Alternatively, preservation can be controlled via the pH of the product by causing the pH of the aqueous liquid squeezed from the pre-moistened wipe to be greater than about 10.5 or less than about 3.0. Preferred pH-based preservatives include those that are highly volatile such as ammonia (for high pH) and acetic acid (for low pH). When pH-based preservatives are used, particularly

&bull; a* f *■ ·»··

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 130-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

especially when volatile preservatives are used, the concentration of the preservative can be much higher than 0.02%. The use of wipes comprising hydrophobic fibers allows sufficient lubricity on the surface so that acidic preservatives can also be used. In addition, a combination of preservatives can be used to achieve the desired preservative effect. In any case, the preservative(s) can either be applied to the wipe directly before the solution or, alternatively, can be dispersed in the solution before the wipe is moistened.

Alternatively, it may be advantageous to incorporate antimicrobial agents directly into the substrate. In this context, it is preferred to use highly water-insoluble antimicrobial agents, for example those derived from heavy metals. Examples of insoluble antimicrobial agents include zinc pyrithione, bismuth pyrithione, copper naphthenate, copper hydroxyquinoline and the like. Further examples of agents which do not contain heavy metals include dichloro-s-triazinetrione and trichloro-striazinetrione.

V. Cleaning device

5 and 6, there is shown an example of a cleaning implement in the form of a mop 20 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. The mop 20 includes a handle 22, a support head or mop head 24 attached to the handle by a universal joint 25, and a liquid dispensing system having at least one spray nozzle 26 attached to the mop head 24, such an arrangement being described in U.S. Patent No. 5,888,006, issued March 30, 1999 to Ping et al., which is incorporated herein by reference. The spray nozzle 26 is more preferably attached to the upper surface of the mop head 24 adjacent the leading edge 29. Because of the force applied through the handle 22 during use of the mop 20 by a user mopping, scrubbing, and the like, the handle of the mop preferably exhibits a handle deflection of less than about 15 mm as measured by the Handle Bending Test Method described below, and preferably exhibits a deflection of less than about 9 mm. More preferably, the handle 22 exhibits a handle deflection of less than about 0.4 mm. Although the spray nozzle is preferably independent of the handle 22 for directional

&bull; · ·· · &idigr;&igr;&idigr; j ·

TER MEER STEIKTMETSTER & PARTNER GbR - lsi -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

omponents such as the mop head 24 and the universal joint 25, it is possible for the spray nozzle to be located at locations other than the mop head 24. For example, the spray nozzle 26 may be attached to the universal joint 25 or the handle 22. Furthermore, a cleaning liquid may be applied by means of a spray nozzle which is not attached to the mop. For example, as shown in Fig. 7, a mop 120 comprises a handle 22 which is attached to the mop head 124 by a universal joint 25 and a manually operated, hand-held liquid spray device 31 having a container in which the cleaning solution is stored, or alternatively a stand-alone, electrically powered, hand-held liquid spray device 31 may be provided, both hand-held liquid spray devices having a spray nozzle 126. The handheld liquid sprayers 31 are preferably selected to deliver a sufficient amount of the spray liquid 35 per actuation of the sprayer to dispense an appropriate area of the surface to be cleaned in order to achieve a minimum number of actuations for ease of use and to minimize hand fatigue. Low volume handheld liquid sprayers typically dispense at least about 1 ml of liquid per actuation, while high volume handheld liquid sprayers typically dispense at least about 2 ml per actuation. More preferably, a low volume handheld sprayer dispenses between about 1 ml and about 2 ml per actuation, while a high volume handheld sprayer dispenses between about 2 ml and about 5 ml per actuation. An example of a low volume handheld manually operated sprayer for use in the present invention is Model No. T8500 manufactured by Indesco, Inc. of Saint Peters, MI. An example of a manually operated, high volume handheld sprayer suitable for use in the present invention is Model No. 813N manufactured by Indesco, Inc. of Saint Peters, MI. An example of a handheld, electrically operated liquid sprayer suitable for use in the present invention is Model No. 460PH manufactured by Solo, Inc. of Newport News, VA. The handheld liquid sprayer 31 is preferably stored in a cage 32 which is attached to the handle 22. As shown in Fig. 7A,

TER MEER STEI N*M ERSTER "& PARTNER GbR -132-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

, the cage 32 may additionally include a sleeve 37 with one or more screw-like clips 41 for securing the cage around the handle. As will be appreciated, other mechanical fastening means known in the art may be used to secure the cage 32 to the handle 22. Furthermore, other structures may be used to removably secure the hand-held liquid spray device to the mop 120. For example, a shelf having an opening for receiving the spray device could be used. The sleeve 37 may advantageously reinforce the handle 22, particularly when the handle 22 includes one or more connection points 43 and the sleeve 37 extends over such a connection point 43.

The cleaning implements made according to the invention (e.g., mops 20 and 120) utilize a removably attached cleaning substrate 28 for absorbing cleaning liquid and particles from the surface to be cleaned. Cleaning substrate 28 may be provided in one or more forms, such as a liquid absorbing pad (as described above in Section III), a cleaning cloth for dusting (as described above in Section III), or a liquid pre-moistened wipe (as described above in Section IV), etc. Optionally, a scrubbing strip 430 (Figs. 5 and 6) may be adhesively attached adjacent the leading edge 29 of a mop in combination with cleaning substrate 28. Cleaning strip 430 may be provided in a form as discussed above in Section III(G). In this connection, cleaning substrate 28 may remain attached to the mop. When scrubbing is required, the user of the mop merely rotates the mop 90°, placing the mop head 24 in an upright position such that the front edge 29 contacts the floor. Another alternative to locating the scrubbing strip 430 adjacent the front edge 29 is to locate the scrubbing strip adjacent the side edge of the mop head 24. Again, in this case, the mop is rotated 90° and the mop head 24 placed in an upright position to facilitate scrubbing. The cleaning substrate 28 can be mechanically attached to the mop head 24 in a variety of ways. For example, hook fasteners molded onto the lower surface of the mop head 24 can be used in combination with loop connectors provided on the cleaning fabric 28. As shown in Fig. 8,

a aaaa Mti · ·· «

&bull;a·· aa

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -133-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

the upper surface 27 of the mop head 24 may include a plurality of attachment structures 32 for securing the cleaning substrate 28 to the mop head 24. The attachment structures 32 may be of the type described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/374,714 entitled CLEANING IMPLEMENTS HAVING STRUCTURES FOR RETAINING A SHEET, filed August 13, 1999, which application is hereby incorporated by reference. Alternatively, other known attachment structures may be used. For example, other structures having flexible slots may be used.

According to a further embodiment of the invention, a kit may be provided which includes the cage 32 and the container for storing a cleaning liquid suitable for use with the hand-held liquid sprayer 126. Furthermore, the kit may optionally contain one or more cleaning substrates 28. The kit may further contain the mop 120 and the remaining equipment for a complete hand-held sprayer (e.g., a spray head with the spray nozzle 126). Together with the kit or with another article (e.g., a package comprising only the sprayer 126), an instruction manual may be provided which contains instructions that for a unit area (e.g., 1 m ² ) a liquid should preferably be applied evenly to the unit area before mopping. Depending on the amount of liquid delivered per actuation of the hand-held liquid spray device, the instructions for use may further contain one or more instructions aimed at applying a certain volume of liquid (for example, about 10 to 25 ml per square meter of surface to be cleaned) per unit area of the surface, followed by an instruction to move the mop in a predetermined motion, for example up and down and/or in an overlapping motion.

As shown in Fig. 9, the liquid dispensing system additionally includes a container 34 for holding the liquid 35 and a gear pump 36 driven by an electric motor 38. The liquid may be any type of liquid, although the liquid is preferably a hard surface cleaning composition as described in Section II above. A container housing 37 (Figs. 5 and 9) attached to the handle 22 removably receives the container 34.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 134-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The container housing 37 also provides the housing for the gear pump 36, the electric motor 38 and a voltage source 39 used to drive the electric motor 38. The voltage source 39 is connected in series with a switch 40 which is attached to the handle 22. As will be explained in more detail below, the characteristics of the spray nozzle (e.g., the amount, the spray direction, the particle size, the spray angle, etc.) and/or the adjustment of the liquid delivery system (e.g., the voltage characteristics, the pump and motor efficiencies, the pump supply and pump delivery, etc.) are designed to provide a mop 20 which provides maximum cleaning efficiency in a user-friendly device. Although the pump 36 is preferably in the form of a gear pump, other pumps and devices may be used to pressurize the liquid and deliver it to the spray nozzle 26. For example, vane, piston, centrifugal or diaphragm pumps may be used. Furthermore, instead of an electrically or manually driven pump, aerosol spray systems or other delivery systems using compressed gas may be used. The gear pump 36 is attached to a pump housing 42 which is disposed in the container housing 37. The pump housing 42 further has a recessed portion 44 for receiving the container 34. Disposed in the recessed portion 44 is a fluid transfer device 46 as described in U.S. Patent Application No. 09/188,064, entitled INTEGRATED VENT AND FLUID TRANSFER FITMENT, filed November 9, 1998, which is hereby incorporated by reference. The fluid transfer device 46 is in communication with the container 34 for transferring the liquid 35 from the container to the inlet 48 of the gear pump 36. The container 34 has a closure 62 which preferably comprises a valve device as described in U.S. Patent Application No. 09/188,64.

The flexible fluid line 50 is connected to the pump outlet 54 and carries the liquid 35 from the pump outlet 54 to the spray nozzle 26. An outlet shut-off valve 56 is provided adjacent and immediately upstream of the spray nozzle 26. The shut-off valve 56 may be a spring-loaded ball valve or other type of shut-off valve known to those skilled in the art. The purpose of the shut-off valve 56 is to reduce the dripping of the liquid from the spray nozzle 26. As will be explained in more detail below,

TER MEER STElrt'ME'l'STER & PARTNER GbR - 135 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

is purified, the pressure of the shut-off valve 56 should be so great that the liquid entering the spray nozzle 26 has sufficient energy to guide the fluid through the spray nozzle 26 and to divide the fluid into fine droplets.

The electric motor 38 is preferably a direct current electric motor. The electric motor 38 has two electrical terminals 58 and 60 to which is preferably connected the power source 39 which may be provided in the form of a plurality of batteries. When the switch 40 is closed as shown in Fig. 9, a current flows through the electric motor 38 which rotates the gears of the pump 36 to produce a pressure sufficient to open the shut-off valve 56 so that the liquid 35 can flow through the spray nozzle 26. An example of a motor is a 3 volt to 6 volt 200 or 300 series motor such as those manufactured by Mabuchi Industry Company, Ltd. of China, while an example of a spray nozzle is manufactured by Bowles Fluidics Corporation of Columbia, MO. This exemplary spray nozzle is described in more detail in one or more of the following U.S. Patents 4,508,206 issued April 2, 1985 to Stouffer; 5,788,394 issued August 4, 1998 to Hess et al.; and 5,860,603 issued January 19, 1999 to Raghu et al., which patents are incorporated herein by reference. The handle 22, the canister housing 37, the mop head 24, the universal joint 25 and the pump gears can be manufactured by injection molding using thermoplastic materials as is well known. Preferably, the canister housing 37 and the mop head 24 are made of polypropylene, while the universal joint 25 is made of DELRIN and the pump gears are made of an acetal copolymer. The handle 22 can be made of aluminum by extrusion. The voltage source 39 preferably comprises four AA 1.5 volt Panasonic Alkaline Plus batteries connected in series.

As shown in Fig. 10, the spray nozzle and the other various components of the liquid delivery system are selected to provide a spray pattern 62 having dimensions and one or more spray effects that enable effective cleaning with the mop. As used herein, the term "spray pattern" refers to the shape and dimensions of the pattern with which the liquid is dispensed under a given set of operating conditions (e.g., volumetric flow rates).

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 136 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

flow rate, inlet pressure to the spray nozzle, etc.). As used herein, the term "spray efficiency" may refer to any of three parameters of spray efficiency. First, the rated spray efficiency, which refers to a volumetric flow rate of liquid 35 through a spray nozzle per unit area of the spray pattern. Second, the T1200 absorption capacity spray efficiency, which refers to a volumetric flow rate of liquid 35 through a spray nozzle per unit area of the spray pattern and per unit Ti2oo absorption capacity of a cleaning substrate 28 that interacts with the sprayed liquid 35 during the cleaning process. Third, the squeeze spray efficiency, which refers to a volumetric flow rate of liquid 35 through a spray nozzle per unit area of the spray pattern and per unit squeeze of a substrate 25 that interacts with the sprayed liquid during the cleaning process. The T1200 absorption capacity and squeeze are described in more detail in Sections III(I), VIII(A) and VIII(B). In other words, the spray efficiency can be expressed in units of either ml/(sec x cm ² ), ml/(sec x cm ² x g/g) or ml/(sec x cm ² x % squeeze/100). The various spray efficiencies serve as a measure of the cleaning effectiveness of both the liquid delivery system itself and the combination of the liquid delivery system with the cleaning substrate.

Without wishing to be limited by any theory, it is believed that the selection of an appropriate spray pattern and/or spray efficiency of the liquid delivery system for a cleaning device can be useful in enabling effective cleaning and/or doing so in a user-friendly manner. It is further believed that improved cleaning performance can be achieved when a specific volume of the cleaning liquid is applied to a relatively large area. By applying a specific volume of the cleaning liquid to a relatively large area, the cleaning liquid typically experiences a longer residence time on the surface to be cleaned, which allows the loosening and suspension of the dirt and other particulate matter before the cleaning liquid is absorbed by the cleaning substrate. When the cleaning substrate has a high absorption capacity, determined by the following-

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 137 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

methods for determining T1200 absorption capacity and/or by low squeegeeing as determined by the test methods below, coverage of a relatively larger area of the surface of the floor with the same volume of cleaning liquid may be more desirable as compared to a smaller area because if the volume of cleaning liquid is applied to too small an area, the cleaning substrate may prematurely absorb a large portion of the cleaning liquid before the user has the opportunity to effectively mop an adequate area of the surface. This may result in user inconvenience as the user may be forced to interrupt mopping more often than desired to apply additional cleaning liquid. Alternatively, the user may obtain uneven cleaning results between areas where adequate liquid coverage has been achieved compared to areas with insufficient coverage by wiping a partially wetted or even dry floor. While it is preferred that the liquid delivery system provide a spray pattern that is larger rather than smaller, a spray pattern that covers too large an area can cause other problems. For example, if the spray pattern is too large, the user may not be able to reach all areas of the floor covered by the cleaning liquid with the cleaning device without stepping on the area with the spray pattern. In addition, a spray pattern that is too wide can make it difficult to comfortably clean enclosed areas (e.g., a bathroom) without depositing the cleaning liquid on undesirable surfaces such as walls and the like. In fact, this is an example where a smaller spray pattern would actually be preferred. If a smaller spray pattern is desired, the cleaning substrate could be provided with a relatively lower T1200 absorption capacity and/or a relatively higher squeezing to minimize premature absorption of the cleaning liquid.

To achieve the desired spray patterns and spray efficiencies, the liquid delivery system can be configured to provide the desired spray pattern and/or spray efficiencies or the user can be instructed to handle the mop in a particular manner. Thus, preferred instructions for use can be combined with

·

·

TER MEER STEII^TvfEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 138-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

be provided with an article of manufacture, such as a package, for cleaning devices with liquid delivery systems which give a relatively small spray pattern (for example less than about 0.1 m ² ), the instructions indicating to operate the liquid delivery system for a predetermined period of time for a particular surface to be cleaned (for example, applying the cleaning liquid to each m ² by operating the liquid delivery system for about 2 seconds and about 8 seconds) and by swinging the cleaning device from side to side while held above the surface to be cleaned. Alternatively or in addition to the above instructions, other instructions could instruct the user of the cleaning device to move the cleaning device up and down and/or in an overlapping manner while held above the surface to be cleaned. Any of the instructions described above can be supplemented with the information that the nozzle is directed downwards towards the surface to be cleaned. Another preferred instruction manual may be provided in combination with an article of manufacture, such as a package for cleaning implements having liquid delivery systems that provide a relatively large spray pattern (e.g., between about 0.1 m ² and about 0.4 m ² ), which conveys instructions to operate the liquid delivery system on a particular surface to be cleaned for a predetermined period of time (e.g., to apply cleaning liquid per m ² by operating the liquid delivery system for between about 2 seconds and about 8 seconds) and to move the cleaning implement across the floor in a predetermined motion (e.g., up and down, side to side, or overlapping).

An alternative approach is to create a spray pattern that can be adjusted by the user of the cleaning device to be larger or smaller depending on the surface to be cleaned and/or surrounding structures that need to be cleaned.

As shown in Fig. 10, the spray pattern 62 (the term "spray pattern" refers to the pattern produced by a single nozzle 26) has a spray depth 64, a spray width 66, a mop head overspray area 68 and a spray gap 70. The term "spray depth" as used herein refers to the distance from the line 71 which is where less than 0.1 ml ± 0.05 ml of the sprayed liquid first hits a

TER MEER STEINM'eTsTE'r *& PARTNER GbR - 139 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

surface to be cleaned, up to the line 72 at which 90% ± 2% of the liquid is sprayed by the spray nozzle 26, and lies within the area 74 formed by the spray angle lines 76 and 78 and the lines 71 and 72. The spray angle lines 76 and 78 are defined by the spray angle 80 of the spray nozzle 26. The term "spray angle" refers to the angle 80 between the lines 76 and 78 within which 95% ± 2% of the liquid sprayed by the nozzle 26 falls within the open triangle formed by the lines 76 and 78. The term "mop head overspray area" as used herein means the distance that the spray pattern 62 extends beyond the side edges 82 of the cleaning substrate. As used herein, the term "spray gap" refers to the distance from the exit plane 84 of the spray nozzle 26 to the line 71 at which 0.1 ml ± 0.05 ml of the first liquid deposit occurs. Table 1 summarizes the spray pattern dimensions that provide the user and cleaning benefits discussed above. The dimensions given in Tables 1 and 2 refer to spray pattern dimensions at any operating condition of the liquid delivery system of a cleaning device. More preferably, the spray pattern dimensions of Tables 1 and 2 refer to the dimensions or dimensions achieved by a liquid delivery at both the maximum spray nozzle inlet pressure and the maximum spray nozzle volume flow rate during normal operation. As used herein, the term "spray nozzle inlet pressure" refers to the overpressure either at the spray nozzle inlet or, if a shut-off valve is provided immediately upstream of the spray nozzle, to the overpressure at the inlet of the shut-off valve. More preferably, the spray pattern dimensions of Tables 1 and 2 refer to the dimensions produced by a liquid dispensing system having a spray nozzle, a pump, an electric motor, a shut-off valve, and a battery power source, the spray pattern dimensions or dimensions produced at the maximum target voltage of the battery power source during normal operation. As used herein, the term "maximum target voltage" refers to the voltage between terminals 58 and 60 of the electric motor when the power source is fully charged. Exemplary ranges for the pressure, flow rate, and battery operating conditions discussed above are further discussed below.

TER MEER STEINMETSTER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368 /DE-UM

TABLE 1

Depth 64 Width 66 Mophead-About
spray area
68 Spray gap 70 Preferred
Area At least
about 20 cm At least
about 20 cm At least
about 0 cm At least
about 0 cm Even more
preferred
Area Between about
20 cm and
about 90 cm Between about
20 cm and
about 90 cm Between about
0 cm and about
30 cm Between about
0 cm and about
30 cm The most
preferred
Area Between about
30cm and
about 60 cm Between about
30cm and
about 60 cm Between about
0 cm and about
15cm Between about
5 cm and about
15cm

Table 2 below summarizes the preferred spray pattern dimensions of Table 1 as a percentage of the spray pattern dimensions divided by the width 84 of the cleaning substrate.

TABLE 2

Depth 64 Width 66 Preferred area At least about 60% At least about 60% Even more preferred
ter area Between about 60%
and about 300 % Between about 60%
and about 300 % Most preferred
ter area Between about 100%
and about 200 % Between about 100%
and about 200 %

The T^OO absorbent capacity spray efficiency of the mop 20 is at least about 0.000006 ml/(sec x cm ² x g/g), and preferably is between about 0.000006 ml/(sec x cm ² x g/g) and about 0.01 ml/sec x cm ² x g/g). More preferably, the T1200 absorbent capacity spray efficiency of the mop 20 is between about 0.0003 ml/(sec x cm ² x g/g) and about 0.0004 ml/(sec x cm ² x g/g). The squeeze spray efficiency of the mop 20 is at least about 0.0006 ml/(sec x cm ² x (per squeeze unit)) and preferably between about 0.0006 ml/(sec x cm ² x (per squeeze unit)) and about 1 ml/(sec x cm ² x (per squeeze unit)), wherein the squeeze unit is (% squeeze)/100. More preferably, the squeeze spray efficiency is

·« f

N'mOST'

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - i4i -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

of the mop 20 is between about 0.05 ml/(sec &khgr; cm ² &khgr; (per squeeze unit)) and about 0.01 ml/(sec &khgr; cm ² &khgr; (per squeeze unit)). The rated spray efficiency is at least about 0.0002 ml/(see &khgr; cm ² ), and more preferably it is between about 0.0002 ml/(sec &khgr; cm ² ) and about 0.02 ml (see &khgr; cm ² ). Even more preferably the rated spray efficiency is between about 0.001 ml/(sec &khgr; cm ² ) and about 0.002 ml/(sec &khgr; cm ² ).

Although the spray pattern 62 has been described in terms of the absolute and relative dimensions of the spray pattern 62, the spray pattern 62 can also be characterized by the exit conditions of the spray nozzle 26, particularly the average exit velocity, the spray angle, and the average droplet size of the spray jet exiting the spray nozzle 26. The term "average exit velocity" as used herein refers to the velocity of the spray jet at the exit plane 84 of the spray nozzle 26, which is equal to the volumetric flow velocity of the liquid divided by the exit area of the spray nozzle 26. The average exit velocity of the nozzle 26 is at least about 0.009 cm/sec, and more preferably is between about 0.009 cm/sec and about 0.9 cm/sec. More preferably, the average exit velocity is between about 0.01 cm/sec and about 0.02 cm/sec. These preferred exit velocity ranges are further preferably combined with a spray nozzle 26 that provides a spray angle 80 of at least about 30° and/or an average liquid particle size of at least about 100 μιη, more preferably a spray angle 80 between about 30° and about 120° and/or an average liquid particle size between about 100 μιη and about 3050 μιη. Even more preferably, average exit velocity ranges are combined with a spray angle 80 of between about 50 and about 75° and/or an average liquid particle size between about 500 μιη and about 1050 μιη. The spray nozzle exit conditions described above refer to spray nozzle exit conditions under any operating conditions of the liquid dispensing system of a cleaning device. More preferably, the spray nozzle exit conditions referred to above refer to spray nozzle exit conditions produced by a liquid discharge at both the desired maximum spray nozzle inlet pressure and the maximum volumetric flow rate during normal operation. More preferably,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 142 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

the spray nozzle discharge conditions referred to above to spray nozzle discharge conditions produced by a liquid dispensing system having a spray nozzle, a pump, an electric motor, a shut-off valve and a battery power source, the spray nozzle discharge conditions being produced at the maximum desired voltage of the battery power source during normal operation. Exemplary ranges for the pressure, flow rate and voltage operating conditions referred to above are described in more detail below.

The various components of the liquid delivery system of the mop 20 work together to achieve the preferred spray patterns and/or spray efficiencies described above for an appropriate period of time so that a user of the mop 20 achieves a relatively consistent spray performance throughout the useful life of the power source 39.

In a preferred embodiment, the gear pump 36 provides a volumetric flow rate of at least about 2 ml/sec, and more preferably a volumetric flow rate between about 2 ml/sec and about 20 ml/sec. Even more preferably, the gear pump 36 provides a volumetric flow rate between about 3 ml/sec and about 10 ml/sec.

Furthermore, the gear pump 36 produces the above-described volumetric flow rates at a nozzle inlet pressure of at least about 6 kPa, and more preferably at a spray nozzle inlet pressure between about 6 kPa and about 320 kPa. Even more preferably, the gear pump 36 produces the above-described volumetric flow rates at a spray nozzle inlet pressure between about 50 kPa and about 160 kPa. In a liquid dispensing system having a spray nozzle, a pump, an electric motor, a shut-off valve, and a battery power source, the above-described pump flow rates and spray nozzle inlet pressures are produced at the maximum desired voltage of the battery power source during normal operation.

Furthermore, the pump 36 provides the above-mentioned volumetric flow rates and spray nozzle inlet pressures during a period of continuous pumping operation of at least about 5 minutes, and preferably during a period of continuous pumping operation (as opposed to cyclic pumping operation) of at least about 15 minutes. More preferably, the pump 36 provides the volumetric flow rates

TER MEER STEINMEVsTER & PARTNER GbR - 143 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

speeds and spray nozzle inlet pressures during a period of continuous pumping operation between about 5 minutes and 20 minutes. To achieve these periods of continuous pumping operation, the voltage supply to terminals 58 and 68 of electric motor 38 during the specified periods of continuous pumping operation is at least 1.5 volts. More preferably, the voltage output to terminals 58 and 68 during the specified periods of continuous pumping operation is between about 1.5 volts and about 6 volts. Even more preferably, the voltage supply to terminals 58 and 68 during the specified periods of continuous pumping operation is between about 1.8 volts and about 3.6 volts. Exemplary representations of the voltage, volumetric flow rate and spray nozzle inlet pressure as a function of the efficiency of operation of a cleaning device according to the invention are shown in Fig. 11.

The volumetric flow rate and spray nozzle inlet pressure at a given voltage are also a function of the efficiency of the pump 36 and/or the electric motor 38. The efficiency of the pump 36 is at least about 3%, and more preferably at least about 6%, and most preferably at least about 12%. More preferably, the efficiency of the pump is between about 3% and about 30%. The efficiency of the electric motor is at least about 50%, preferably at least about 70%, and even more preferably between about 70% and about 100%. As used herein, the term "motor efficiency" or "pump efficiency" means the ratio of the power output of the pump or motor to the power input. As can be seen, a given volumetric flow rate and/or a given spray nozzle inlet pressure at a given voltage can be increased by increasing the efficiency of the pump and/or the electric motor, which in turn shifts the pressure and volumetric flow rate curves given in Fig. 11 upward.

As shown in Fig. 9, the container 34 is preferably arranged above the pump 36 so that a fluid pressure is present on the pump inlet 48 to preload the pump, while at the same time the pressure difference of Pi minus P2 generated by the pump is essentially non-deformable.

(i.e., the walls of the vessel do not deform measurably enough to substantially prevent the generation of suction pressure or subatmospheric

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 144-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

pressure P2 within the container 34). Preferably, the difference between the static pressure P2 and the pressure Pi, the latter corresponding to atmospheric pressure when the pump 48 is in place (i.e., when the gears of the pump 36 are submerged in the liquid 35), is sufficiently large to open the shut-off valve 86 as quickly as possible. According to a preferred embodiment, the shut-off valve 86 has an opening or gap pressure of at least about 0.5 kPa, more preferably between about 0.6 kPa and about 20 kPa, to enable easy pump start-up operation. In other words, the pump 36 is capable of generating a static suction pressure P2 of at least about 0.7 kPa within the container 34, the static suction pressure preferably being between about 0.7 kPa and about 20.1 kPa. More preferably, the shut-off valve 86 exhibits an opening pressure between about 1 kPa and about 10 kPa while the pump 36 is capable of generating a static pressure P2 between about 1.1 kPa and about 10.1 kPa. If the pump 36 is unable to generate a suction pressure P2 sufficient to open the shut-off valve 86, the user of the mop may be instructed to squeeze the container 34 to assist in starting the pump 36. For example, instructions for use may be provided with the article of manufacture (such as a kit or package containing the mop 20) that include instructions to squeeze the container 34 either before, during, and/or after actuation of the pump 36.

TEST METHODS

The following procedural measures are useful for determining parameters used to evaluate the cleaning devices of the invention. These methods are preferably used to characterize the performance of the cleaning device. Specific units may be suggested in connection with the measurement and/or calculation of the parameters described in the methods. These units are given merely as examples. Other units consistent with the aim and purpose of the methods may also be used.

t *

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 145-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Stem bending test method

This method is designed to determine the deflection of the handle of a cleaning device. As shown in Fig. 12, the handle 22 is placed on a first support 87 and a second support 88, the supports 87 and 88 being provided at approximately the ends 89 and 90 of the handle 22. The supports 87 and 88 serve only to support the handle. A pointer indicator 91, such as Model No. ID-C 150EB manufactured by Mitutoyo, Japan, having a measuring range of 0.001 mm to 50.8 mm, is placed at the center 92 of the handle 22 and a first reading is recorded. A 5 kg weight is then placed at the center 92 of the handle 22. After 10 minutes a second reading is taken. The handle deflection corresponds to the difference between the first and second readings.

The following examples illustrate the application of the stem bending test method.

example 1

A rod 94 cm long, 22 mm outside diameter and 16 mm inside diameter made of aluminum is placed between the first and second supports 87 and 88. The first reading is 0.299 mm and the second reading is 1.001 mm. The rod deflection is therefore 0.702 mm.

Example 2

A rod 91 cm long, 22 mm outside diameter and 16 mm inside diameter made of aluminum is placed between the first and second supports 87 and 88. The first reading is 0.005 mm and the second reading is 0.395 mm. Consequently, the bend of the rod is 0.390 mm.

Test methods for determining the spray pattern
35

These procedures are used to adjust the spray pattern of a cleaning

g t* * ·&diams;

TER MEER STEIN'METSTER "& PARTNER GbR - 146-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

device. The test methods are described with reference to an example of a mop for the purpose of clarity. As will be appreciated, the respective test methods can also be used to evaluate any device, however constructed. The test methods for determining spray pattern are intended to be applied to cleaning devices, with reference to the spray nozzle. The water to be sprayed by the mop is colored, for which purpose any known dye may be used.

a) Spray depth

The dimension of the spray nozzle is determined as follows. Place the leading edge of the mop in question adjacent to a first absorbent sheet having dimensions sufficient to capture at least about 98% of the water discharged by the mop. The first absorbent sheet may be any absorbent sheet which substantially absorbs the sprayed water as it strikes the sheet and which has a water impermeable barrier layer on the underside so that water absorbed by the sheet is retained by the sheet. A satisfactory absorbent sheet is manufactured by Buckeye Absorbant Technologies, Inc., Memphis, TN under the trademark VIZORBPLUS™. This preferred absorbent sheet is an airlaid web of three components, namely a cellulose pulp, bicomponent fibers and an absorbent gel material, the absorbent sheet material having an absorbent capacity of at least about 17 grams of saline solution per gram of sheet material. The first absorbent sheet is weighed to determine its dry weight. After the mop is put into operation, a water spray is emitted from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water has been dispensed, with at least the volumetric flow rate and the spray nozzle inlet pressure corresponding to the maximum value in the intended application of the mop in question during liquid dispensing. The first absorbent cloth is then weighed (the wet weight) and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of water collected by the first absorbent cloth. This weight of water is converted to volume in the usual way. If the volume of water collected by the absorbent cloth is more than 95% of the volume of water dispensed by the spray nozzle, a second absorbent cloth is tested in which the depth 93 (Fig. 13) of the second absorbent cloth is 98% of the depth

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 147 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

93 of the first absorbent cloth. If less than 95% of the water volume is captured by the first absorbent cloth, a larger first absorbent cloth is tested until more than 95% of the water is captured by the absorbent cloth, after which a second absorbent cloth is tested in the manner described. The second absorbent cloth, as well as any subsequent absorbent cloths, is made of the same material as the first absorbent cloth. The second absorbent cloth is weighed (dry weight). After the mop is started up, a jet of water is dispensed from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water is dispensed, with at least the volume flow rate and the spray nozzle inlet pressure being at the maximum values for the intended use of the mop during liquid dispensing. The second absorbent cloth is then weighed (wet weight) and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of water captured by the second absorbent cloth. This weight of water is converted to volume in the usual manner. If the volume of water captured by the second absorbent cloth is greater than 90 ± 2% of the volume of water delivered by the spray nozzle, a third absorbent cloth is tested in which the depth 93 of the third absorbent cloth is equal to 98% of the depth of the second absorbent cloth. The procedure described above is repeated until 90% ± 2% of the water delivered by the spray nozzle is captured by the absorbent cloth. After this absorbent cloth has captured a volume of water equal to 90% ± 2% of the volume delivered by the spray nozzle, the depth 93 of the cloth is measured, this dimension corresponding to the depth of the spray pattern.

b) Spray angle

The spray angle is determined as follows. If the spray pattern is substantially triangular in shape (i.e., has a generally triangular shape in planar view), the spray angle can be determined in a similar manner to the spray depth. In particular, a first absorbent cloth large enough to capture at least 98% of the sprayed water is placed in front of the mop. The first absorbent cloth is in the shape of an equilateral triangle as shown in Fig. 13A, with the angle 95 of the tip of the absorbent cloth adjacent to the spray nozzle large enough to capture at least 98% of the water delivered by the spray nozzle.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 148 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

volume of water within the triangle defined by the apex. The first absorbent cloth is weighed to determine its dry weight. After the mop is started up, a spray of water is emitted from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water has been dispensed, with at least the volumetric flow rate and the spray nozzle inlet pressure being at the maximum values for the intended use of the mop during liquid dispensing. The first absorbent cloth is weighed (wet weight) and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of water collected by the first absorbent cloth. This water weight is converted to volume in the usual way. If the volume of water collected by the absorbent cloth is greater than 98% of the volume of water dispensed by the spray nozzle, a second absorbent cloth is tested with the angle of the apex equal to 98 % of the angle of the apex of the first absorbent cloth. If less than 98% of the water volume is captured by the first absorbent sheet, a larger first absorbent sheet is tested until more than 98% of the water is captured by the absorbent sheet, after which a second absorbent sheet is tested in the manner described. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (dry weight). After the mop is started, a spray of water is dispensed from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water has been dispensed, with at least the volumetric flow rate and the spray nozzle inlet pressure being at the maximum values for the intended use of the mop in question during liquid dispensing. The second absorbent sheet is weighed (wet weight) and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of water captured by the second absorbent sheet. This weight of water is converted to volume in the usual manner. If the volume of water collected by the second absorbent cloth is greater than 95 ± 2% of the volume of water delivered by the spray nozzle, a third absorbent cloth is tested in which the angle 95 of the tip of the third absorbent cloth is equal to 98% of the angle of the tip of the second absorbent cloth. The procedure described above is then repeated until 95% ± 2% of the water delivered by the spray nozzle has been collected by the absorbent cloth. After this absorbent cloth has collected a volume of water equal to 95% ± 2% of the volume delivered by the spray nozzle, the angle 95 of the tip is

* · *· &idigr;&Sgr; *i Ji*

TER MEER STEINMETSTER*& PARTNER GbR - 149-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ze adjacent to the spray nozzle, which dimension corresponds to the spray angle of the spray pattern.

c) Spray width

The spray width is determined as follows. For spray patterns that are not fan-shaped, the width of the spray pattern is the width at a predetermined depth of the spray pattern that is sufficient to form a rectangle wide enough to collect the total amount of water to the depth of the spray pattern. For spray patterns that are triangular in shape, the spray width is defined by the spray angle and spray depth as determined above.

d) Spray gap

The spray gap is determined as follows. The leading edge of the mop is placed adjacent to a first rectangular absorbent sheet having dimensions sufficient to capture less than 10% of the water discharged by the mop. The first absorbent sheet is weighed to determine its dry weight. After the mop is started, a spray of water is discharged from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water has been discharged, with at least the volumetric flow rate and the spray nozzle inlet pressure being at the maximum values for the intended use of the mop in question during liquid discharge. The first absorbent sheet is weighed (wet weight) and the wet weight is subtracted from the dry weight to determine the weight of water retained by the first absorbent sheet. This weight of water is converted to volume in the usual manner. If the volume of water collected by the absorbent cloth is greater than 5 % of the volume of water delivered by the spray nozzle, a second absorbent cloth is tested with the depth 93 (Fig. 13) of the second absorbent cloth equal to 98% of the depth of the first absorbent cloth. The second absorbent cloth is weighed (dry weight). After the mop is started, a spray of water is delivered from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water has been delivered, with at least the volume flow rate and the spray nozzle inlet pressure equal to the maximum values for the intended use of the mop in question during liquid delivery. The second absorbent cloth is weighed (wet weight) and the

·

·

TER MEER STElKflvl^iSTE'R "& PARTNER GbR - 15&Ogr; -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Wet weight is subtracted from dry weight to determine the weight of water retained by the second absorbent cloth. This water weight is converted to volume in the usual manner. If the volume of water retained by the second absorbent cloth is greater than 0.1 ml ± 0.05 ml of the volume of water delivered by the spray nozzle, a third absorbent cloth is tested in which the depth 93 of the third absorbent cloth is 98% of the depth 93 of the second absorbent cloth. The above procedure is repeated until 0.1 ml ± 0.05 ml of the water delivered by the spray nozzle is captured by the absorbent cloth. After this absorbent cloth has captured a volume of water equal to 0.1 ml ± 0.05 ml of the volume delivered by the spray nozzle, the depth 93 of this cloth is measured, this dimension corresponding to the spray gap of the spray pattern.

e) Area of the spray pattern

The area of the spray pattern is determined as follows. In the case of triangular spray patterns, the area of the spray pattern is defined by the spray depth, the spray angle lines resulting from the spray angle and the spray gap, if any. In the case of non-triangular spray patterns, the spray pattern corresponds to the rectangular area limited by the spray depth and the spray width.

Test method for determining spray effectiveness

This method is used to determine the various spray efficiencies of a cleaning device. This test method is described herein with reference to an example of a mop for the sake of clarity. As will be appreciated, the present test method can also be used to evaluate any cleaning device, however constructed. The water sprayed by the mop is colored, and any dye known in the art can be used.

The spray pattern of the mop in question is first determined according to the test methods for determining the spray pattern. The mop is then placed in front of an absorbent cloth in such a way that the front edge over which the water spray is sprayed during use is directly adjacent to the absorbent cloth. The first absorbent cloth can be

TER MEER STEIKi^EI'STE'r'cC PARTNER GbR - i5i -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The preferred absorbent sheet may be an absorbent sheet which substantially absorbs the water impinging on the sheet and has a water impermeable barrier layer on the underside so that the water absorbed by the sheet is retained by the sheet. A satisfactory absorbent sheet is manufactured by Buckeye Absorbant Technologies, Inc., Memphis, TN under the trademark VIZORBPLUS™. This preferred absorbent sheet is an air-laid web comprising three components, namely a cellulose pulp, bicomponent fibers and an absorbent gel material, the absorbent gel material having an absorption capacity of at least 17 grams of saline solution per gram of sheet material. The shape and dimensions of the absorbent sheet correspond to the spray pattern dimensions (depth, width, spray angle, spray gap) determined in the manner described above, with the absorbent sheet being aligned with the spray nozzle such that the orientation of the absorbent sheet corresponds to the spray pattern of the nozzle.

The absorbent cloth is weighed before wetting (dry weight of the absorbent cloth). After the mop is started, a water spray is released from the spray nozzle until at least 10 ml of water has been sprayed, with at least the average exit speed and the spray angle in the exit plane of the spray nozzle corresponding to the maximum values for the intended use of the cleaning device in question. The duration (in seconds) of the spraying process is measured and recorded. The absorbent cloth is weighed after the spray jet has been released (wet weight of the absorbent cloth). The difference between the measured weights of the absorbent cloth corresponds to the weight of the water that has been absorbed by the absorbent cloth. The weight of the water is converted into the volume of water (in ml) in the usual way.

The T1200 Absorption Capacity Spray Efficiency is calculated as follows, where the T1200 Absorption Capacity value (in g/g) is the value for a specific selected cleaning substrate:

T1200 Absorption Capacity Spray Efficiency = ((Volume of
absorbed water) / spray time) / (area of spray pattern &khgr;
T1200 absorption capacity))

; 5 * &idgr;

NMeTsTE*R '&

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -152-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The squeeze spray efficiency is calculated as follows, where the squeeze value (as % / 100) represents the value for the selected cleaning substrate in question:

Squeeze-spray efficiency = ((absorbed water volume /
Spray time) / (area of spray pattern &khgr; squeeze))

The rated spray effectiveness is calculated as follows:
Rated spray effectiveness= ((Absorbed water volume /
Spray time) / (area of spray pattern))

Removable cleaning pad and/or cleaning cloth

The present invention is based on the convenient handling of a cleaning pad, which is preferably disposable, which provides significant cleaning benefits. The cleaning performance benefits are combined with the structural properties of the present cleaning pad as described above, with the ability of the pad to remove and retain loosened soil components. The cleaning pad and/or cloth can be designed to be used in conjunction with a handle to form a cleaning device. As a removable, preferably disposable cleaning pad, the cleaning pad preferably comprises an attachment layer as described above. The attachment layer preferably comprises a clear or transparent polyethylene film and/or a hook-loop technology or an adhesive strip.

According to an alternative embodiment, the attachment layer 403 of a cleaning pad 400 shown in Fig. 4b can be designed such that the Y dimension (width) of the attachment layer is greater than the Y dimension of the other elements of the cleaning pad so that the additional width of the attachment layer can engage attachment structures 33 arranged on a mop head 24 as shown in Fig. 8.

Removable pre-moistened cleaning cloth

Removable pre-moistened cleaning cloths can be used in combination with the handles described above to create a cleaning device

&bull; · ·· t · ·· S &idigr;&diams;*

TER MEER STEELFT ^! METSTER ^# & PARTNER GbR -153-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Such a cleaning device can be used for cleaning lightly soiled hard surfaces and can also be used in the cleaning methods described below, preferably in the two-stage cleaning methods.

VI. Other objects and specific embodiments

Although particular embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and/or described, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications may be made that depart from the teachings of the present invention, so that the following claims also cover all modifications of this kind that are also the subject of the present invention.

VII. Application and cleaning procedures

A. Wall cleaning process

In a wall cleaner, the compositions may be distributed using a sprayer in combination with a polisher, or may be more conveniently metered using an applicator roller, such as a manually or motorized paint roller. When such rollers are used, it is important to remove dirt from the rollers. This can be achieved either by washing the device with water when it is very dirty, or by using a squeegee to scrape dirt from the roller. The squeegee may be used separately or in a housing together with the roller. Hand-held wall cleaning devices may also be used.

Where appropriate, the device is attached to a handle to allow for access to harder to reach areas, adequate coverage and easier handling. For further convenience, the compositions can be dispensed in the form of a pre-moistened wipe. The pre-moistened wipe delivers the cleaning fluid and scrubbing surface in one operation.

It is especially important to control the dosage and area coverage when the surface is sensitive. For best results, i.e. dirt

&bull; · &bull; ·

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -154-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

removal with minimal or no surface damage, the dosage should preferably be from about 1 ml to about 20 ml per square meter, more preferably from about 2 ml to about 10 ml per square meter. For best results, the product is applied at the dosages indicated above to completely cover the surfaces to be treated and then allowed to air dry. Directions for use include pictures and/or words further explaining the preferred application pattern and dosage. The compositions of the invention are mild and will minimize damage to most painted surfaces. Preferably, the use of solvents in this application is limited or nonexistent. Preferred compositions for cleaning walls include the preferred Ce-ie alkyl polyglycosides together with or without hydrophilic polymers. The compositions are ideally suited for light maintenance work, i.e., general maintenance of painted and/or wallpapered surfaces, because of their mildness and generally low content of active ingredients. Additional benefits in the case of painted walls are provided by the hydrophilic polymer, which provides brightness, restores gloss and prevents further contamination.

B. Procedures for cleaning shop counters and/or furniture
In a counter and furniture cleaner, the compositions may be dispensed using a sprayer in combination with a polisher, or may be more conveniently dosed using a hand-held device or a stick-mounted device for reaching more distant areas, covering them and making them easier to use. Optionally and for further convenience, the compositions may be dispensed in the form of a pre-moistened wipe. The pre-moistened wipe allows the liquid to be applied and scrubbed in one operation. The wipe may also contain softening and abrasive materials if necessary for cleaning stains. To achieve best results, i.e. removing dirt while producing a high gloss without streaks on the treated areas without the need for rinsing, the dosage should preferably be about 5 ml to about 30 ml per square meter, more preferably about 10 ml to about 20 ml per square meter. The compositions of the invention are

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -155-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

mild and minimize damage to most painted surfaces and wood or worn Formica® surfaces. The preferred compositions for cleaning walls include the preferred Ce-16 alkyl polyglycosides either with or without hydrophilic polymers. The compositions are ideally suited for light cleaning operations, i.e. daily or weekly maintenance, since the product is mild and generally contains low levels of active materials. Importantly, the residual levels of the hydrophilic polymers provide shine and soil prevention. Solvents, particularly volatile solvents, are preferably incorporated into these compositions since they allow additional cleaning when required without the formation of streaks and without the use of a rinse. The compositions also allow easier cleaning in the next operation of grease, encrusted food and stains due to the residual polymer left on the surface. In addition, the compositions can be used with equipment that enhance cleaning such as abrasive pads, heat and steam. For retail counters, antimicrobial benefits are particularly desirable. It has been shown that compositions containing such active ingredients can enhance the bactericidal benefits of disinfectant compositions delivered via the cleaning substrates. Furthermore, frequent use of the product in the care routine provides benefits in terms of bacterial prevention.

C. Floor cleaning procedures

In the context of cleaners for floor surfaces, the compositions can be distributed using a sponge, mop or strip mop. Floor cleaners are compositions intended to clean and maintain common floors inside and outside homes and offices. Floors that can be cleaned with the compositions of the invention include the floors of living rooms, dining rooms, kitchens, bathrooms, basements, attics, vestibules, etc. These floors can be made of ceramic, porcelain, marble, Formica®, unwaxed vinyl, linoleum, wood, natural stone tiles, clinker, cement and the like.

In connection with conventional cleaning equipment, such as sponges, mops and strip devices, which are preferably equipped with mop heads and handles,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 156-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

the compositions may be ready to use, i.e. used as is, or may be diluted in a bucket or other suitable container using dilution factors indicated in the instructions. For best results, a good sweeping and/or vacuuming is recommended before wet mopping. It is recommended that the least soiled floors be cleaned first and then the more heavily soiled surfaces are addressed. This maximizes the use of solution and limits contamination from one room to another. The head of the device is dipped or immersed in the solution (either diluted or ready to use) and wrung out. The device should not be completely dry before mopping, nor should it be dripping wet.

A preferred mopping pattern using a sponge mop or floor cloth employed with a brush and handle is in an overlapping up-down motion from left to right (or right to left) and then repeated using an overlapping up/down pattern from right to left (or left to right). The up-down motion preferably covers about 0.5 m to about 1 m. The left to right distance is preferably about 1 to 2 m. After mopping this area, i.e. about 0.5 m ² to about 2 m ² , the sponge mop or floor cloth should be re-immersed in the solution and wrung out. By applying this measure, the volume of solution left behind or on the floor is about 20 ml to about 50 ml per square meter, preferably about 30 ml to about 40 ml per square meter.

Using a mop or strip mop (e.g. made of cellulose, polyvinyl alcohol (PVA), cotton, synthetic materials or blended fibers or mixtures thereof), a preferred mopping pattern consists of an overlapping up-down motion from left to right (or right to left) which is then repeated using an overlapping sideways-sideways motion from right to left (or left to right). The up-down motion preferably covers about 0.5 m to about 1 m. The sideways-sideways pattern from right to left (or left to right) preferably covers about 0.5 m to about 1 m. The outer dimensions of the mop pattern preferably comprise a square shape, for example 0.5 m ² to about 1 m ² . After mopping this area,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 157-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

After the floor has been cleaned, the mop or strip mop should be dipped into the solution again and wrung out. By repeating this action, the volume of solution left on the floor will be about 20 ml to about 50 ml per square meter, preferably about 30 ml to about 40 ml per square meter.
Where appropriate and to improve uniformity of results using conventional mops, the composition (either in diluted form or in ready-to-use form) is stored in one container and the mop rinse water in another container. This two-container arrangement may comprise two separate units or a combination unit. Examples of this embodiment include squeeze bottles, pump sprayers, mechanical sprayers, garden sprayers and electric or battery-operated metering devices. The advantages of this method of application are that fresh solution is always applied to the floor and that soiled water (from cleaning the floors) is prevented from re-soiling the floor. In addition, this method provides effective control of microorganisms as there is less re-soiling, thus achieving a more sterile end result. This method of application is also advantageous for stain removal, ie difficult to clean areas can be pre-treated with the product before mopping is carried out. This method of application also allows flexibility in dosing control, such that more solution can be applied to the dirty areas and less to the clean areas, thereby improving product utilization.

If necessary and to achieve more uniform and better quality results, the composition can be applied directly to the floor as a ready-to-use solution, either in liquid form or in spray form. Examples of this method of application include squeeze spray bottles, handle spray bottles, mechanical sprayers, garden sprayers and electric or battery-operated dosing devices. The advantages of this method include that fresh solution is always applied to the floor and that the mop is kept in low use, particularly when the mop is not re-contacted with the dirty solution (i.e. the mop can be used for longer by wringing out the old solution and only applying fresh solution to the floor). Furthermore, this method enables the effective removal of microorganisms from the cleaning equipment,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -158-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

thus providing a more sterile end result (i.e. less re-infestation by the microorganisms). This method of application is also beneficial for spot cleaning, i.e. one can pre-treat difficult to clean areas with the product before starting to mop. This method of application allows flexibility in controlling the dosage so that a greater amount of the solution is applied to the soiled areas and a lesser amount to the clean areas, thus improving product utilization.

Optionally, the fresh solution can be applied using a motorized system. An example of a motorized system for cleaning floors is the Dirt Devil® Wet Vac device. Preferably, the motorized system comprises a chamber containing fresh solution and a second chamber for sucking up and retaining the dirty solution removed from the floor. The motorized device preferably further comprises squeezing and/or scrubbing devices. The scrubbing device can be made of cotton, cellulose sponges, etc. The dispensing unit can consist of a simple unit having a lever (which can be calibrated for one or more dosage amounts) for metered dispensing of the liquid onto the floor. It is recommended to sweep and/or vacuum well before using the motorized cleaning system. A preferred wiping pattern comprises an overlapping up-down movement from left to right (or right to left), which is then repeated using an overlapping up-down pattern from right to left (or left to right). The up-down motion preferably covers about 0.5 m to about 1 m. The distance from left to right is about 1 to about 2 m. After mopping this area, ie about 0.5 m ² to about 2 m ² , the motorized cleaning unit is moved, the solution is squeezed out in a squeegee-like motion to form a puddle and then sucked up using vacuum into the dirty solution receiving chamber.

D. General cleaning and floor cleaning using

pre-moistened cleaning wipes

Optionally, and for increased convenience in floor cleaning, the compositions may be dispensed in the form of a pre-moistened wipe as described above, the wipes

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 159 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

preferably attached to a mop head and/or handle. The pre-moistened wipe can provide liquid dispensing and scrubbing in one operation. The mopping pattern with a pre-moistened wipe used with a handle is preferably performed in an overlapping up-down motion from left to right (or right to left) and then repeated using an overlapping up-down pattern from left to right (or right to left). This up-down motion preferably covers about 0.5 m to about 1 m. The left to right distance is preferably about 1 m to about 2 m. This mopping pattern is then repeated until the wipe is either substantially exhausted or dried. The pre-moistened wipes can be used with advantage particularly for cleaning small areas such as are typically found in bathrooms. They are also readily available and versatile, allowing them to be used to clean surfaces other than floors, such as counters, walls, etc., without the need to use a variety of other fluids and/or equipment. This approach also results in effective removal and control of microorganisms by minimizing equipment contamination, which is often seen with traditional reusable systems such as sponges, mops and strip mops. Avoiding equipment contamination results in a cleaner and more germ-free end result.

E. Floor cleaning using a disposable

Cleaning pad

Optionally, and most preferably, convenience and performance can be maximized by using a system comprising a disposable cleaning pad as described above and a method for applying fresh solution to the floor.

The pad may be constructed of a laminate of nonwoven fabric, cellulose and superabsorbent polymer. This cleaning pad is attached to a handle having a carrier head as described above. In such a system, the application of the solution may be achieved via a separate squeeze bottle or sprayer system or may be attached directly to or incorporated into the device (i.e., the mop head or the handle). The dispensing mechanism may be user-operated.

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 16O -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

or can be battery or electrically operated.

This system offers a number of advantages over traditional cleaning methods. It reduces the time required to clean the floor as the pad absorbs the dirty solution. There is no need to carry heavy, dirty buckets. Because of the absorbent pad, which absorbs and retains the dirty solution, a single pad can be used to clean large surface areas.

Furthermore, better hygiene and odor control is achieved by always using a fresh pad that traps germs and dirt, removes them, and then discards them. Traditional mops that are reusable can collect dirt and germs that can then spread throughout the home, causing persistent bad odors in the mop and the home. User-controlled dosing and more effective removal of the dirty solution from the floor provides a better end result.

Because the cleaning process involves the application of small amounts of solution in contact with the floor for a much shorter time than conventional systems (by applying a small amount of solution to the floor and allowing the superabsorbent polymer to reabsorb the majority of the solution, so that the volume left behind by the disposable pad and mop is only about 1 to about 5 ml of solution per square meter), the system provides improved surface safety for delicate surfaces. This is particularly important when cleaning wood, which tends to swell and then contract when exposed to excessive water.

Finally, the system is well suited for pre-treating stubborn dirt stains before a full floor cleaning, which is achieved due to the controlled dosing of the solution. Unlike conventional mops, this system is more effective and better suited for removing spilled material. For example, conventional mops wet the floor when trying to clean up spilled liquids, while absorbent paper towels or cloths require the user to bend down to remove the spilled material. Finally, the device, together with the pad, can be designed to provide easy access to hard-to-clean and difficult-to-reach areas, for example under faucets, tables, counters, etc.

TER MEER STEINMETSTER'ä PARTNER GbR - i6i -

THE PROCTER Se GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

ken and the like. The use of a superabsorbent polymer allows the volume of the pad to be reduced, i.e. the pad is thin yet highly absorbent due to the presence of the superabsorbent structure, which is able to absorb 100 times its weight. This cannot be achieved with traditional mops, which require a larger volume for absorption purposes (cellulose and synthetic structures only absorb up to about 5 to 10 times their weight).

For best results using the disposable pad cleaning system and cleaning device, a good sweeping and/or vacuuming is carried out before mopping begins. Before applying the solution to the surfaces to be cleaned, preferably apply about 10 to about 20 ml to small areas (about half a square meter) and wipe the pad back and forth several times until the solution is substantially completely absorbed. This is important because it primes the pad and allows it to perform its function most effectively. In applications where the dispensing mechanism is separate from the device (e.g. a remote dispensing system), one priming measure may be to spray the solution directly onto the pad to provide an even coverage of about 10 to about 20 ml. Apply the solution at a rate of about 5 to about 40 ml, more preferably about 10 to about 30 ml per square meter, spreading the liquid as widely as possible over the area to be cleaned. This is then followed by wiping using the disposable pad.

A preferred wiping pattern includes an overlapping up-down motion starting on the lower left (or right) side of the section to be cleaned and then continuing the wiping pattern across the floor using up-down wiping motions. Wiping is then continued starting on the upper right (or left) side of the section to be cleaned and reversing the direction of the wiping pattern using a side-to-side motion. Another preferred wiping pattern includes an up-down wiping motion followed by an up-down wiping motion in the reverse direction. These highly preferred wiping patterns allow the pad to loosen and absorb solution, dirt and germs and result in a better result by minimizing the residue left behind. Another

TER MEER STEINM'EIS'tER ^PARTNER GbR - 162 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Another advantage of the above wiping pattern is the minimization of streaking as a result of improved solution spreading and the elimination of streak lines created by the edges of the pad.

The pads are versatile in that they can be used for multiple cleanings and on a variety of surfaces. Each pad is designed to clean an average sized floor (approximately 10 to approximately 20 m ² ) with an average level of dirt. Pads will need to be replaced sooner if floors are larger than average or particularly dirty. To determine if the pad needs replacing, look at the back of the pad to ensure that the back absorption layer is not saturated with liquid and/or dirt.

The use of the present compositions, which can be applied without rinsing, results in improved performance compared to the types of compositions previously marketed for the treatment of non-bath/shower area surfaces including floor surfaces, walls and store counters.

F. Two-stage floor cleaning process

The present invention further includes a method for cleaning hard surfaces, particularly floors such as vinyl, linoleum, wood and laminate floors, which generally includes a dry mopping operation followed by a wet mopping operation. It has been found that by performing a dry mopping operation before a wet mopping operation, particularly using the preferred equipment of the invention, a significantly better visually acceptable surface is achieved with regard to filming and/or streaking and significantly better soil removal, resulting in a cleaner surface. The method of cleaning a hard surface according to the invention may comprise:
30

(a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and a removable dry cleaning substrate, preferably a water-entangled nonwoven cleaning cloth as described above, to remove dust and fine particulate material from the surface;

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - 163-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM January 21, 2003

(b) contacting the surface with a hard surface cleaning composition, preferably a hard surface cleaning composition as described above, to wet the surface;

(c) contacting the wet surface with a cleaning implement having a handle and a removable cleaning pad, preferably a cleaning pad as described above, to substantially completely remove the hard surface cleaning composition from the surface; and

(d) Allow the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate rinsing solution.

The present invention further comprises a method for cleaning hard surfaces, in particular floors, such as vinyl, linoleum, wood and laminate floors, comprising:

(a) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement having a handle and a removable, dry cleaning substrate, preferably a hydroentangled nonwoven cleaning cloth as described above, to remove dust and particulate material from the surface;

(b) contacting the surface with a cleaning implement comprising a handle and a removable, pre-moistened cleaning wipe, preferably a pre-moistened cleaning wipe as described above, to remove additional soil from the surface; and

(c) Allow the surface to dry without rinsing the surface with a separate rinsing solution.

The use of a two-stage floor cleaning process comprising a dry mop treatment followed by a wet mop treatment serves to improve the overall end result of a wet mop system, such as a cleaning device as described above with a disposable cleaning pad. In addition to achieving an overall better end result, particularly with regard to filming and/or streaking and the removal of dirt from the surface to be cleaned,

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR -164-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

This method allows for an increase in the area that can be cleaned with a single cleaning pad of the present invention and thus increases the usability of the cleaning pad. Increased usability of the cleaning pad results in greater utility for the user.

The present two-step floor cleaning method may be carried out using a two-device system - i.e., a cleaning device for dry mopping and/or dusting and a cleaning cloth for wet mopping - or the present method may be carried out using a single mop system - i.e., using the same cleaning device for both actions. When the present method is carried out using a single mop system, additional advantages include greater convenience as a result of easier storage and potentially lower costs.

In addition, the present two-step floor cleaning process may include an additional step, the third step being for polishing and/or shining the surface, and/or for applying a protective coating and/or for applying a stain-resistant coating.

The improvement in the final result is typically a result of the ability to remove a greater amount of particulate soil (particularly fines) prior to wet mopping. In the context of wet mopping with a disposable cleaning pad, the particulate load and saturation of the cleaning pad are important factors in the overall cleaning performance since no process is used to rinse the pad and/or surface. Although the use of a disposable cleaning pad is typically very effective in picking up soil, including particulate soil, there is eventually a saturation point after which the soil can be redeposited onto the surface being cleaned. Even though the amount of soil redeposited is typically very low, it is usually spread very evenly over a much larger area than from which it was initially picked up. In addition, this fines can combine with solution residue and lead to a final result that gives the surface a hazy (low gloss) appearance as a result of filming and/or streaking.

TER MEER STEINIvfElSTEft &^#'PARTNER GbR - 165 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Although conventional mop systems such as vacuum cleaners or brooms can be used in accordance with the present invention, these dry mop systems are not very effective at picking up fine-particle materials for the following reasons: (1) With conventional systems, users sweep or vacuum away visible dirt (usually larger dirt particles) and leave behind dirt that is less visible (finer particles); (2) brooms are typically made with large bristles that allow fine-particle materials to pass through and not be swept away; (3) many vacuum cleaners are capable of picking up larger particles but only result in the finer particles being stirred up and blown away. In fact, to achieve the desired effect, standard vacuum cleaners must allow a high air flow through the vacuum cleaner's cleaning bags. This air flow contains fine-particle material. This is supported by the literature including Lioy, Wainman, Zhang and Goldsmith, "Typical household vacuum cleaners: the collection efficiency and emission characteristics of surface fine particles" (1999), J. Air Waste Management Association, 49: 200-206.

By providing a method of cleaning hard surfaces which allows consumers to perform a good and effective dry mopping operation prior to a wet mopping treatment, the end result of that cleaning process can be dramatically improved, particularly when using a disposable cleaning pad as described herein for wet mopping. Exceptionally good particle pickup can be achieved using cleaning cloths made from water-entangled polyester fibers. Such water-entangled nonwoven cleaning cloths have been described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/082,349, filed May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkhou et al. (Case 6664M); U.S. Serial No. 09/082,396, filed May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkhou et al. (Case 6798M); and U.S. Patent No. 5,525,397, issued June 11, 1996 to Shizuno et al., which references are hereby incorporated by reference.

To maximize the synergy between dry dusting and wet mopping, the present methods may be practiced using various varying embodiments and application instructions. In one embodiment, a "kit" may be provided that includes two devices and two types of substrates. One device would be used with dry mops and the other with

ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ
&phgr; ϕ ϕ
ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ
ϕ ϕ &phgr; ϕ ϕ
&phgr; ϕ ϕ &phgr; &bull;
&phgr; &phgr; ItIt ϕ ϕ &phgr;
&phgr; ϕ ϕ ϕ
&phgr; &phgr;
&phgr; ϕ ϕ
ϕϕϕ ϕ &phgr; φφ* &phgr; ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ &bull; φ φ
&phgr; &phgr;
&phgr; ϕ ϕ
φ · &phgr;
φφ Φ· &phgr;
ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ &phgr;
φφ φφ ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ &phgr; * &phgr;
φ · ϕ ϕ ϕ
&phgr; &phgr;
&phgr; ϕ ϕ φ *

TER MEER STEINIviElSTEA' &"PARTNER GbR - 166 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

with wet mop pads. Such a kit preferably provides the user with instructions to always perform a dry mop treatment before a wet mop treatment for best results. The kit may also be sold separately with notes and instructions in each kit used to explain the benefits of using both systems together. Optionally, the promotion may include a coupon or mail-in coupon in each of the separate kits encouraging the consumer to purchase and use both devices to achieve synergistic benefits. In another embodiment, the present methods may be performed using an "all-in" mop that includes dry cleaning cloths that can be attached and cleaning pads and/or wipes for wet mopping that can be attached to the same mop and used for both treatments. Further, the kit may include user instructions to always dry mop before wet mopping for best results.

Although benefits can be achieved on any floor, on floors with greater texture, pores and voids, such as vinyl floors and ceramic floors, particular benefits are obtained when an effective dry mop treatment is carried out prior to wet mopping. The benefit is a significant improvement in the final appearance, particularly with regard to the filming and/or streaking of the dirt left behind. This improvement can be seen when cleaning floors with either loose fine particle material or areas where mixtures of particulate material and grease are adhered. The improvement in cleaning efficiency is visible when the dry mop treatment is carried out with a separate device or when the same device is used as for the wet mop treatment. Without carrying out an effective dry mop treatment first, a wet mop cleaning method is preferably carried out using a cleaning pad having functional sleeves as described above, since the functional sleeves assist in scrubbing and picking up particulate material. However, if the method of cleaning hard surfaces involves an effective dry mop treatment, acceptable end results, particularly with regard to filming and/or streaking, can be achieved with a wet mop treatment using a cleaning

&bull;
&bull;
&bull; &bull;
· ·
&bull; &bull;
&bull; ·
· · ·
·· · ·* J ,1. ·
···
&bull; &bull;
· ·
·· ·
&bull; &bull;
· &bull;
·· ·· &bull;
· · · &bull; · ··· &bull; &bull; · *·

TER MEER STEINIGSTER* ^PARTNER GbR - 167 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368 /DE-UM 01/21/2003

pad as described above without having the optional functional cuffs. This is due to the fact that an effective dry mop treatment removes a significant amount of particulate matter from the surface, particularly larger particulate matter which is the typical dirt trapped by the functional cuffs of the present cleaning pads.

According to one embodiment, the dry mop system includes a cleaning device that is lightweight (about 200-400 g), has a multi-position universal joint, and is designed to allow dry dusting cloths to be attached (for example, by means of attachment structures disposed on the mop head as described above or using mechanical clamps). The light weight and flexibility are important to enable frequent use and to control particulate dirt and dust, fibers and hair. The dry mop system further includes dry cleaning cloths, preferably comprised of water-jet entangled polyester fibers with patterning and additives as described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/082,396, filed on

May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkhou et al. (Case 6798M); U.S. Serial No. 09/082,349, filed May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkhou et al. (Cse 6664M); and U.S. Patent No. 5,525,397, issued June 11, 1996 to Shizuno et al., which references are incorporated herein by reference.

In this embodiment, a wet mop system comprises a cleaning device having a more stable, durable structure (weighing about 1100-1300 g) designed primarily for wet mopping. The wet mop system preferably has a container for mounting a bottle of hard surface cleaning composition and a built-in spray mechanism. Such a cleaning device has been described above and is shown in Figs. 5 and 8. The mop head of such a cleaning device preferably has Velcro hooks on the bottom for mounting a cleaning pad having an attachment layer comprising a Velcro loop material. The wet mop system further comprises a cleaning pad as described above.

According to a further embodiment, a "complete" cleaning device is provided, which is equipped with both dry cleaning cloths for the

TER MEER STEINlv£rS*TER ^PARTNER GbR -168-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

dry mops as well as absorbent cleaning pads for wet mopping. Such a cleaning device is preferably light but sufficiently strong (about 600-900 g). It preferably has a universal joint, which is a multi-position joint that allows both easy dry and wet mopping and also allows a wiping motion. The handle of such a cleaning device preferably has a container for attaching a bottle with a cleaning solution for hard surfaces and a built-in spray mechanism. The handle of the cleaning device can alternatively be free of the liquid delivery system.

Such a cleaning device can dispense a hard surface cleaning solution by means of a bottle separate from the cleaning device and having either a pressure spray device or a simple dispensing cap (similar to a water bottle). This device can optionally include a device for securing a bottle to allow two hands to be used when mopping, such as a cage structure for receiving the bottle as described above and shown in Figure 7. The mop head of the handle of the cleaning device preferably has Velcro hooks on the lower surface for securing a cleaning pad and fastening structures or mechanical clamps on the top of the mop head for securing a dry cleaning cloth. Such a handle of a "complete" cleaning device is shown in Figure 8 and described above. The "complete" cleaning device further comprises a dry cleaning cloth, preferably made of a water-entangled polyester material having a pattern and additives as described in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 09/082,396, filed May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkhou et al. (Case 6798M); U.S. Serial No. 09/082,349, filed May 20, 1998 by Fereshtehkou et al. (Case 6664M); and U.S. Patent 5,525,397, issued June 11, 1996 to Shizuno et al. The dry cleaning cloths are preferably large enough to be secured over a wet pad and to be inserted into mounting structures on the mop head or to be clipped to mechanical fasteners. This provides a additional advantage of the dry cleaning cloth, which conforms to the pyramid shape of a cleaning pad with a variety of planar surfaces. According to an alternative embodiment of the dry cleaning cloth, the dry cleaning cloth has a notch

TER MEER STEINTvfEfS'TEft &"PARTNER GbR - 169-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

at both ends of the dry cleaning cloth. Through these notches it can be attached to mechanical clips or fastening structures on the top of the mop head. These notches allow this cloth to be used with a cleaning pad in either a dry or a wet environment. In a wet environment, the notches allow the solution to be dispensed from a spray nozzle without blocking the solution. The notches also allow freedom of movement of the universal joint. The "complete" cleaning device further comprises a cleaning pad according to the invention.

According to an alternative embodiment of a "complete" cleaning device, the cleaning device comprises a dry cleaning cloth in combination with an absorbent cleaning pad to form a single dry/wet cleaning substrate. The dry/wet cleaning substrate comprises a storage layer with a high absorption capacity (for example 100-1000 g), a fastening layer and a liquid-permeable scrubbing layer. This storage layer is preferably attached directly to Velcro hooks provided on a mop head of the "complete" cleaning device. The other part of the pad preferably lies directly above the storage layer and is preferably in direct contact with the floor (and is therefore referred to as the primary floor pad). The primary floor pad can be used for dry mopping and/or for wet mopping. The primary floor pad can be a composite material with an outer layer of material suitable for picking up particulate dirt (for example polyester entangled by means of water jets), a Absorption layer for absorbing a certain amount of liquid (capacity 20-100 g) and an outer layer which allows solution and dirt to penetrate through it into the lower, more absorbent absorption pad and which can be used to attach a primary pad to the mop head by attachment to the top of the mop head having attachment structures or mechanical clamping devices.

Instructions for use may also be provided with instructions to place a primary pad over a storage pad and to first perform a dry mop treatment. These instructions for use may also include instructions to remove the soiled primary floor pad and replace it with a clean primary

r=l·" W-I

TER MEER STEINlvfEli*TER &"PARTNER GbR - 17O -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

floor pad. Then a small area (10 m ² ) is to be wet-mopped with this primary pad placed above the storage pad. Then the soiled primary pad is to be removed and a new primary pad is to be placed on the same storage pad to clean another area of 10 m ² . The reason for this is to improve performance by using a removable mini-pad so that the floor can be contacted with a fresh layer to minimize re-deposition of soil. At the same time, it reduces the high cost of the absorption capacity of a lower storage pad. In other words, the user could use 2 to 10 primary pads for each storage pad.

The memory pad may be attached to the mop using a Velcro fastener with loops (on the pad) and hooks (on the mop). Alternatively, the primary pad may be attached using various mechanisms: (1) it may have "wings" that can be attached to mechanical clamps or attachment structures on the top of the mop head; (2) it may have "wings" with an adhesive as described above that can be attached to a primary pad; or (3) one may provide a loop material on a primary pad that can be attached to the hook material on the memory pad. According to another alternative embodiment of a "complete" cleaning device, dry/wet cleaning may be achieved with a single pad that has two different sides. In such a pad, one side has a substrate structure that is effective for dry mopping. The opposite side (by opposite we mean turning the pad 180°) comprises a substrate designed for wet mopping. The advantages of such a construction are that the user can easily switch between dry and wet mopping, which can be advantageous when dry/wet cleaning varies from room to room, as opposed to first dry mopping the entire house and then doing the final cleaning by wet mopping. To protect the dry mop side of the pad from becoming wet during wet mopping, the pad may optionally comprise a liquid impermeable layer comprising a material such as polyethylene.

The dry mop cloth can then be placed over this liquid-impermeable layer. On the other hand, the liquid-impermeable

: &idgr;

TER MEER STEINiviEf^TE*R &*PARTNER GbR - i7i -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

impermeable layer is larger than the mop head so that it is used as an attachment layer which is clamped or mechanically attached to structures provided on the top of the mop head. To further protect the dry mop substrate from becoming wet during wet mopping, the dry mop substrate can be made narrower than the liquid impermeable barrier attachment layer. In this design, the liquid impermeable attachment layer shields the dry mop layer from liquid contact. Instructions for use may be provided on how to use the two sides effectively, including instructions to attach the mop/cleaning pad to the mop head such that the dry mop substrate is in contact with the surface to be cleaned, then wipe the surface with the mop/cleaning pad, then remove the mop/cleaning pad and reattach the pad to the mop head such that the wet mop substrate is in contact with the surface to be cleaned, then wipe the surface with the mop/cleaning pad.

VIII. Test methods

A. Performance under pressure

This test measures the amount of deionized water absorbed per gram of a cleaning pad placed sideways in a piston/cylinder assembly under an initial compression pressure of 0.09 psi (about 0.6 kPa). (Depending on the composition of the cleaning pad sample, the compression pressure may decrease slightly as the sample absorbs water and swells during the test period.) The objective of this test is to determine the ability of the cleaning pad to absorb fluid over a practical period of time when the pad is subjected to use conditions (horizontal water soaking and pressures).

The fluid used in the Pressure Performance Capacity (LUD) test is deionized water. This fluid is absorbed by the cleaning pad under defined absorption conditions at a hydrostatic pressure of approximately zero.

A device 510 suitable for this test is shown in Fig. 14. At one end of this device is a fluid container 512 (for example

TER MEER STEINTCf£f§TE'R cTPARTNER GbR -172-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

A container 512 is provided (e.g. a Petri dish) with a lid 514. The container 512 rests on an analytical balance generally indicated as 516. The other end of the device 510 includes a fritted funnel generally indicated as 518 , a piston/cylinder assembly generally indicated as 520 which fits into the funnel 518 , and a cylindrical plastic fritted funnel lid generally indicated as 522 which fits over the funnel 518 , the lid being open at the bottom and closed at the top, the top having a pinhole. The device 510 has a system for directing the fluid in both directions which consists of sections of capillary glass tubing indicated as 524 and 531a , a flexible plastic hose (for example, a Tygon tubing with an inner diameter of 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) and an outer diameter of 9.53 mm (3/8 inch)) indicated as 531b , stopcock assemblies 526 and 538 and Teflon connectors 548, 550 and 552 for connecting the glass tubes 524 and 531a and the stopcock assemblies 526 and 538. The stopcock assemblies 526 consist of a three-way valve 528, glass capillary tubes 530 and 534 in the main fluid system and a section of glass capillary tube 532 for filling the container 512 and for Forward flushing of the frit disk in the frit hopper 518. The shut-off valve assembly 538 similarly consists of a three-way valve 540, glass capillary tubes 542 and 546 in the main fluid line, and a section of glass capillary tube 544 which serves to drain the system.

As shown in Figure 15, the assembly 520 consists of a cylinder 554, a cup-like piston designated by the reference numeral 556 , and a weight 558 which fits into the piston 556. Attached to the lower end of the cylinder 554 is a No. 100 mesh stainless steel wire mesh 559 which has been drawn tight by biaxial stretching prior to attachment. The cleaning pad sample, generally designated 560 , rests on the screen 559 with the contact surface (or scrubbing surface) in contact with the screen 559. The cleaning pad sample is a circular sample having a diameter of 5.4 cm. Although the sample 560 is shown as being single-layered, the sample is actually a circular sample with all of the layers contained in the pad from which the sample was cut. Furthermore, it is understood that the cushion from which the circular sample is taken at any

DE 299 2H- «t39 Ui

TER MEER STEIN'MEI'sTe'r cTpARTNER GbR -173-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

a location on the pad having the absorption capacity defined therein conforms to the teachings of the invention. This means that if a cleaning pad has areas comprising different materials across the thickness of the pad, samples should be taken from each of these areas and the absorption capacity of each sample measured. If any of the samples have the absorption capacity values described above, the pad is deemed to have that absorption capacity and thus conforms to the invention.

Cylinder 554 is machined from a rod of transparent LEXAN® plastic (or equivalent material) and has an inside diameter of 6.00 cm (area = 28.25 cm ² ), a wall thickness of about 5 mm and a height of about 5 cm. Piston 556 is in the form of a Teflon cup and is machined to fit closely within cylinder 554. A stainless steel cylindrical weight 558 is also machined to fit closely within piston 556 and is provided with a stem (not shown) on its top to facilitate removal. The combined weight of piston 556 and weight 558 is 145.3 g, which corresponds to a pressure of 620 Pa (0.09 psi) for an area of 22.9 cm ² .

The components of the device 510 are sized such that the flow rate of the deionized water at a hydrostatic pressure of 10 cm is at least 0.01 g/cm ² /sec, the flow rate being normalized by the area of the frit funnel 518. Factors that can particularly affect the flow rate are the permeability of the frit disk in the frit funnel 518 and the inside diameters of the glass tubes 524, 530, 534, 542, 546 and 531a and the shut-off valves 528 and 540.

The container 512 is mounted on an analytical balance 516 which has an accuracy of at least 0.01 g with a fluctuation of less than 0.1 g/h. The balance is preferably connected to a computer with software which (i) monitors the weight change of the balance at predetermined time intervals from the start of the LUD test and (ii) can be set to start the measurement at a weight change of 0.01 - 0.05 g depending on the sensitivity of the balance. The capillary tube 524 inserted into the container 512 should not touch the bottom or the lid 514 of the container. The volume of the (not shown)

TER MEER STEINHARTER & PARTNER GbR -174-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The level of fluid (prepared) in the container 512 should be sufficient so that no air is drawn into the capillary tube 524 during the measurement. The level of fluid in the container 512 at the start of the measurement should be about 2 mm below the upper surface of the frit disk in the frit funnel 518. This can be confirmed by placing a small drop of fluid on the frit disk and gravimetrically monitoring its flow back into the container 512. This level should not change significantly when the piston/cylinder assembly 520 is placed in the funnel 518. The container should have a sufficiently large diameter (for example, about 14 cm) so that withdrawal of portions of about 40 ml results in a change in the fluid level of less than 3 mm.

Before measurement, the assembly is filled with deionized water. The frit disk in the frit funnel 518 is flushed forward to fill it with fresh deionized water. As far as possible, air bubbles are removed from the lower surface of the frit disk and the system connecting the funnel to the container. The following actions are then performed by sequential operation of the three-way valves:

1. Excess fluid on the upper surface of the frit disk is removed (e.g., poured off) from the frit hopper 518.

2. The height or weight of the solution of the container 512 is adjusted to the appropriate level or value.

3. The frit hopper 518 is positioned at the correct height relative to the container 512.

4. Then the fry hopper 518 is covered with the fry hopper lid 522.

5. The vessel 512 and the frit hopper 518 are balanced with the valves 528 and 540 of the shut-off valve assemblies 526 and 538 in the open connection position.

6. Valves 528 and 540 are then closed.

7. The valve 540 is then rotated so that the funnel is opened to the drain pipe 544.

8. The system is then allowed to equilibrate in this position for 5 minutes.

9. Then the valve 540 is returned to the closed position.

TER MEER STEINMIi'STER cCpARTNER GbR - 175 -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

Steps 7-9 temporarily "dry" the surface of the frit hopper 518 by subjecting it to a small hydrostatic suction pressure of about 5 cm. This suction pressure is applied when the open end of the tube 544 is about 5 cm below the level of the frit disk in the frit hopper 518 and is filled with deionized water. Typically about 0.04 g of fluid is withdrawn from the system during this procedure. This procedure prevents primary absorption of deionized water when the piston/cylinder assembly 520 is placed in the frit hopper 518. The amount of fluid draining from the frit hopper during this procedure (referred to as the frit hopper correction weight or "WfTc") is measured by performing the LUD test (see below) for a period of 20 minutes without the piston/cylinder assembly 520 . Essentially all of the fluid removed from the frit funnel during this operation is very rapidly reabsorbed into the funnel when the test is commenced. Consequently, it is necessary to subtract this correction weight from the weight of fluid removed from the container during the LUD test (see below).

A round punched sample 560 is placed into the cylinder 554.

The funnel 556 is then slid into the cylinder 554 and placed on the cleaning pad sample 560. The piston/cylinder assembly 520 is then placed on top of the frit portion of the funnel 518 , the weight 558 is inserted into the piston 556 and the top of the funnel 518 is then covered with the frit funnel cover 522. After the balance reading for stability has been taken, the test is started by opening the valves 528 and 540 to connect the funnel 518 to the reservoir 512. When the measurement is automatically initiated, data collection begins immediately as the funnel 518 begins to absorb fluid again.

The data are recorded at intervals for a total period of 1200 seconds (20 minutes). The LUD absorption capacity is determined as follows:

ti200 absorption capacity (g/g) = [Wr _(t =o) - Wr _(t =i200) - WfTc]/Wds

where ti2oo-absorption capacity is the g/g capacity of the pad after 1200 seconds, Wr(t=o) is the weight of the container 512 in grams before the start of

TER MEER STEINivfEl'STER cCpARTNER GbR -176-

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

measurement, Wr(t=i200) is the weight of container 512 in grams 1200 seconds after the start of the measurement, Wffc is the frit funnel correction weight and Wds is the dry weight of the cleaning pad sample.

B. Squeezing

The ability of the cleaning pad to retain fluid when subjected to the pressures used in use and thus to avoid "squeeze-out" of the fluid is another important parameter of the present invention. "Squeeze-out" is measured in a complete cleaning pad by measuring the amount of fluid that can be sucked out using a Whatman filter paper at a pressure of 1.5 kPa (0.25 psi). Squeezing is done on a sample that has been saturated by horizontal wicking (in particular, by wicking over the surface of the pad consisting of the scrubbing layer or surface contacting layer). (One way to obtain a saturated sample is described as the "Horizontal Gravimetric Wicking Method" in copending U.S. patent application Serial No. 08/542,497, filed October 13, 1995 by Dyer et al., which is incorporated herein by reference.) The fluid-containing sample is then placed horizontally in a device capable of exerting the appropriate pressures, preferably by using an air-filled bag that provides an evenly distributed pressure across the surface of the sample. The squeeze value is referred to as the weight of test fluid withdrawn per weight of wet sample.

If a cleaning pad has areas that comprise different materials throughout the thickness of the pad, samples should be taken from each of these areas and the squeeze values measured on all samples. If any of the samples have a squeeze value as described above, the pad is considered to have that squeeze value.

C. Elasticity

"Resilient" is the ability of a dry cleaning pad to spring back to its original thickness (Z-direction) when subjected to water saturation and compression with a downward force, and is another important parameter of the present invention. The elasticity is determined according to the

TER MEER STEINMEISTER & PARTNER GbR - m -

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM 01/21/2003

The elasticity of the cleaning pad is determined by the following method. A cleaning pad is saturated with an aqueous non-ionic buffered solution. The initial thickness of the pad (the Z dimension) is then measured. A downward pressure (equivalent to approximately 1.5 kPa (0.25 psi)) is then applied to the cleaning pad parallel to its Z dimension. The pressure is released and the thickness of the cleaning pad is measured after a period of 30 seconds. The elasticity is expressed as a percentage and represents the ratio of the thickness after compression under pressure to the original thickness before any pressure is applied and the pad is saturated. 10

The following examples serve to illustrate the invention without limiting it.

IX. Examples
15

A. Fragrance

The following are non-limiting examples of fragrances suitable for incorporation into the present hard surface cleaning compositions.
20

Fragrance A Fragrance material wt% range

Phenylhexanol 0.1 - 1.0

cis-3-hexenyl acetate 0.1 - 1.0

Phenylethyl alcohol 10.0-50.0

Benzyl acetate 1.0 - 10.0

Benzyl propionate 1.0 - 10.0

Dihydromyrcenol 1.0 - 10.0

Hydroxycitronellal 1.0 - 10.0

Geraniol 1.0 - 10.0

Citronellol 1.0 - 10.0

Citronellal nitrile 1.0 - 10.0

Linaloole 1.0 - 10.0

Dipropylene glycol 10.0 - 50.0 35

TER MEER STEINM'EI^TER ^PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 178 - 21.01.2003

Fragrance B Fragrance material

Hexyl acetate

cis-3-hexenyl acetate

beta-gamma-hexanol

Prenyl acetate

Lugustral

Ethyl 2-methylbutyrate

Neroli

Citral

Citronellal nitrile

Decylaldehyd

Octylaldehyd

Verdox

Methyldihydrojasmonat

Limate

Dipropyl glycol

Wt% range

1.0 - 10.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.01 - 1.0 10.0 - 50.0 1 .0 - 10.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 1.0 - 10.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.01 - 1.0 10.0 - 50.0

Fragrance C Fragrance material

Hydroxycitronellal

Helional

Dimethylbenzylcarbinol Citral
Methyldihydrojasmonat

Hexyltin aldehyde

Citronellal nitrile

Dihydromyrcenol Orangeterpenes Dipyropylene glycol

Wt% range

1.0 - 10.0 1.0 - 10.0 0.5 - 5.0 1.0 - 10.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 0.5 - 5.0 10 .0 - 50.0 10.0 - 50.0 10.0 - 50.0

These fragrances represent non-limiting examples of fragrances suitable for use in the hard surface cleaning compositions of the present invention to produce a positive fragrance signal without adversely affecting filming and/or streaking on the surface being cleaned.

V ! '■ 5.1. UO

TER MEER STEINMfEl'j'TER & PARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY

Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 179 21.01.2003

B. Cleaning compositions for hard surfaces
The following are non-limiting examples of hard surface cleaning compositions useful in the present invention, particularly in combination with the present cleaning pads and/or cleaning implements. The amounts of the ingredients are percentages based on the weight of the composition.

EXAMPLE A B C D E component 0.03% ... 0.03% ... ... 0.01% 0.02% 0.01% ... ... Neodol 1-5 ¹ ... 0.05% ... 0.004% 0.004% Witconat NAS-8 ² --- ... ... 0.1% ... Planteran 2000 ³ --- ... ... ... ... Ammonium hydroxide 0.01% 0.01% 0.06% ... 0.01% Glacial acetic acid 2.0% 2.0% 2.0% 4.0% 4.0% DMAMP-80 ⁴ 0.015% 0.015% 0.015% 0.003% 0.003% Dowanol PnP ⁵ ... ... ... ... ... Polyvinylpyridine-N-
oxide 0.00125% 0.00125% 0.00125% ... ... l-Methoxy-2-butanol 0.033% 0.06% 0.035% ... ... Silicone foam base
pusher ⁶ ... ... 0.001% ... ... Fragrance rest rest rest rest rest Xylenolphthalein Deionized water

TER MEER STEINTviEfSTER cTpARTNER GbR

THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY

Case: 7368/DE-UM

- 180 21.01.2003

EXAMPLE F G H I component ... 0.03% 0.03% 0.03% ... 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% Neodol 1-5 ¹ 0.004% ... ... ... Witconat NAS-8 ² 0.01% ... ... ... Planteran 2000 ³ ... 0.05% 0.05% ... Ammonium hydroxide ... ... ... 0.01% Glacial acetic acid 4.0% ... 2.0% ... DMAMP-80 ⁴ 0.003% 0.015% 0.015% 0.015% Dowanol PnP ⁵ ... ... ... 2.0% Polyvinylpyridine-N-oxide ... 0.00125% 0.00125% 0.00125% l-Methoxy-2-butanol 0.015% 0.03% 0.03% 0.03% Silicone foam suppressor ⁶ ... ... ... ... Fragrance rest rest rest rest Xylenolphthalein Deionized water

¹ C11E5 alcohol ethoxylate, commercially available from Shell Chemical.

² Straight chain C ₈ sulfonate, commercially available from Witco Chemical.

³ Ce-Ciö-alkyl polyglucoside, commercially available from Henkel.

⁴ 2-Dimethylamino-2-methyl-l-propanol, commercially available from Angus Chemical.

⁵ Propylene glycol n-propyl ether, commercially available from Dow Chemical.

⁶ Silicone foam suppressors, commercially available from Dow Corning under the brand Dow Corning AF® Emulsion.

ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕϕ

φ φ φ φ φ

&bull; φφ φ φφ φ

ϕ ϕ

&bull; φ φ φ ·φ

? ·&Igr;&Igr; φ ?

Claims (4)

1. Cleaning device in the form of a mop ( 20 ) with a handle ( 22 );
a support head ( 24 ) attached to the handle by means of a universal joint ( 25 );
a cleaning substrate ( 28 ) removably attached to the upper surface ( 27 ) of the carrier head ( 24 ) via a plurality of fastening structures ( 33 ) having flexible slots;
a liquid dispensing system comprising at least one spray nozzle ( 26 ) attached to the upper surface of the carrier head ( 24 ) adjacent the leading edge ( 29 );
wherein the cleaning substrate ( 28 ) is in the form of a dry cleaning cloth having cuts at both ends enabling it to be attached to the upper side ( 27 ) of the carrier head ( 24 ) without blocking the discharge of liquid from the spray nozzle ( 26 ). 2. Cleaning device according to claim 1, characterized in that the removably attached cleaning substrate ( 28 ) has wings which can be attached to the fastening structures ( 33 ) on the upper surface ( 27 ) of the carrier head ( 24 ). 3. Cleaning device according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the detachably attached cleaning substrate ( 28 ) is in the form of a cleaning pad which a) at least one absorption layer, b) at least one liquid-permeable abrasive layer and c) has a fixing layer. 4. Cleaning device according to claim 3, characterized in that the at least one liquid-permeable scouring layer comprises a macroscopically expanded three-dimensional plastic fabric with tapered or funnel-shaped openings and/or surface irregularities and the at least one fastening layer comprises a clear or translucent material.